Home

2014 Dodge Dart Owner`s Manual

1. lg OVERHEAD CONSOLE 3 22 cre Rhe 271 Mi POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED 282 Front Map Reading Lights 272 Opening Sunroof Express 283 Sunglass Bin Door 00000 272 Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 284 ll GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED 273 Closing Sunroof Express 284 E Before You Begin Programming HomeLink 274 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 284 Programming A Rolling Code 275 Pinch Protect Features cosest caasas eaa daa 284 Programming A Non Rolling Code 277 Pinch Protect Override 0 285 Canadian Gate Operator Programming 278 Venting Sunroof Express 285 Using HomeLink sss 280 Sunshade Operation 06 285 DECUIILY sien aa gale owiehe Re dee 280 Wind Buffe ing uer pere ere recs 285 Troubleshooting Tips 00 280 Sunroof Maintenance sess 285 General Information llle 282 WI ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS TF EQUIPPED 25 24 aie aoe eee ana REUS 286 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME B CUPHOLDERS 00005 290 Rear Seat Armrest Storage If Equipped 295 Front Seat Cupholders siis 290 B CARGO AREA FEATURES 295 Rear Seat Cupholders llus 290 Cargo Area 60 4
2. Underhood Fuses Cavity Maxi Mini Fuse Description The Power Distribution Center is located on the right side Fuse of the engine compartment behind the battery F01 70 Amp Body Control LS Tan Module 1 F02 60 Amp Body Control Blue Module 2 F03 30 Amp Output For Starter Green Relay 1 F04 40 Amp ESC Pump Motor Orange F05 40 Amp Transmission Con Orange trol Module 1 EA F06 30 Amp Body Control Green Module 3 Power Distribution Center F07 40 Amp mE EBL RLY Coil Orange Blower Motor RLY Coil 598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Maxi Mini Fuse Description Cavity Maxi Mini Fuse Description Fuse Fuse F09 5 Amp Radiator Fan F18 20 Amp Engine Control Tan Yellow Module F10 10 Amp ORC F19 10 Amp A C Compressor Red Red Clutch F11 20 Amp Run Start Engine F20 30 Amp Rear Defroster Yellow Control Module Green EBL F14 15 Amp Transmission Con F21 20 Amp Fuel Pump Blue trol Module 2 Yellow F15 15 Amp Transmission Con F22 10 Amp Occupant Re Blue trol Module 3 Red straint Controller F16 15 Amp Engine Control F23 25 Amp Brake System Blue Module Ignition Natural Module Coils F24 20 Amp Engine Control F17 15 Amp Brake System Yellow Module Fuel In Blue Module jectors ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599 C
3. 450 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS functions similar to a limited slip differential BLD and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section for more information Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rat
4. llle 466 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Security Alarm Security Alarm 21 Vehicle Storages om ko cabo i EU CHER ENS 401 Voice Command Commands ise e IY EEREN E P 201 Voice Recognition System VR isses 199 Warning Flasher Hazard 200 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 648 INDEX es Warnings and Cautions lesse 6 Warranty Information llle 624 Washer Adding Fluid 55e penses mat aaah ere Se ais 574 Washers Windshield 0 000000 245 Washing Vehicle osai dr a aes ae atin ears as 589 Water Driving Through 000 441 Wheel and Wheel Trim llle 591 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 0 591 Wind Buffeting llle eee 45 Window Fogging Wind OWS dre ues eet he d ewe e feet aped E A1 POWE eu such eh dealt ge itariki topa ai 41 Windshield Defroster llle 109 Windshield Washers iscas eimai 0 00000 e eee 243 Windshield Wiper Blades 0 0 573 Windshield Wipers llle 243 Wiper Blade Replacement 0 573 Wipers Intermittent llle 244 Wipers Rain Sensitive aie d ea ie e 246 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehi cle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must
5. 00 0 eee eae 45 Door Locks 2 do kao arem aa c aw a 33 MIEEXOIS 23 dece hx adda pom i a Re RE Uode od 122 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 286 SUNO e raaa aa Mit RNa ole hah TT 282 Windows ce ee eee 41 Power Steering Fluid 2004 610 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 60 Preparation for Jacking lille 534 Pretensioners Seat Bells 44 5 9 sspe urea x y OR Ros 59 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 24 Radial Ply Tires Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap Radio Operations 5 duced oe m Red as 387 Rain Sensitive Wiper System sess 246 Rear Camera i22 ie em RI RIDE ERIS 269 Rear Cupholder 3 mec CREER aes 290 Rear ParkSense System ss bee er Rem eh 255 Rear Seat Folding sere eder 229 Rear Window Defroster ooon nunana nuaa 299 Rear Window Features 0000 299 Recorder Event Data osoare surae oea a a 83 Recreational Towing 0 0 0 0 aeai 515 Reformulated Gasoline 000 493 Retrigeratt ide ad E e Yu Rare aos 570 Reminder Lights On sas amedee naani ee eee 237 Reminder Seat Belt 0 0 0 00 00 0000 eee 59 Remote Control Starting System lille 28 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 24 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 385 Remote Starting System s eeaeee aeaa n E a 28 en INDEX 643 Remote Trunk Release llle 45 Replacement Bulbs 0 0000
6. en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 529 NOTE If the Mode Select Knob 5 is on Air Mode and the pump is operating air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose 7 only not the Sealant Hose 6 If the sealant white fluid does flow through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose typically takes 30 70 seconds As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose 6 the Pressure Gauge 3 can read as high as 70 psi 5 Bar The Pressure Gauge 3 will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi 5 Bar to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty 2 The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi ately after the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver side latch pillar recommended pressure Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge 3 If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated press the Defla tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn off the TI
7. Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB 5 Supplemental Driver Side and Passenger Knee Airbags Trunk Emergency Release Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupant 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners and load limiters that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event e All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design Thi
8. Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Phonebook Cleared Enter Number New Entry Added 81c6bf80 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Setp ege eer ome Ba og Rss Te y emm mm Announcement m NN Poic List Pnones nee Select a language Engiish Espanol Prompts pin code Phones e i to be deleted or Francais Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing System System Lists All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s zero all one call two cancel three confirmation prompts four continue five delete six dial seven download eight edit nine emergency star English plus erase all pound Espanol add location Francais 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s help previous home record again language redial list names return to main menu return or main menu list phones select phone select mobile send mute set up phone
9. NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds e MAX AIC For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation buttons at the same time e ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature and select only Panel Bi Level or Floor modes 5 Mode Control Air Direction Rotate this control to choose from several patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the control or a blend of two of these modes The closer the setting is to a particular symbol the more air distribution you receive from that mode e Panel J Air is directed through the outlets in the instru ment panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391 NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi Level 2 Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor P Air is directed through the floor outlets with a s
10. This vehicle is equipped with an after run pump to cool the turbocharger after the engine is shut off Depending on the type of driving and the amount of cargo the pump will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger Although the pump is rubber mounted for quiet opera tion it is normal to hear it running during this time 412 STARTING AND OPERATING EEE ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits WARNIGG quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a WARNING standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a yoy or others could be injured if you leave the grounded three wire extension cord vehicle unattended without having the parking The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one brake fully applied The parking brake should al hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine Ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater LAU HUN cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch electrical cord could cause electrocution pedal or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch NOTE During cold weather you may experience in
11. Torque Specifications in this section for the proper pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 545 NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack NOTE The positive battery post is covered with a follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and protective cap Lift up on the cap to gain access to the precautions positive battery post CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury 060864281 Preparations For Jump Start Positive Battery Post The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment behind the left headlight assembly 546 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by moving fan blades e Remove any metal jewelry such as rings watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and ex
12. remove an existing favorite i 3 s ga 1 Radio Player Controis Climate Phone More 3 From the Phone main screen select Phonebook From the Phonebook screen select the Favorites soft key and then select the soft key located to the right of the phonebook record Select an empty entry and Add From Mobile 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se To Remove A Favorite 68 uf P FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out 1 To remove a Favorite select phonebook from the n ERs evens Phone main screen F Voicemail 2 Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and oma Buddy s Pizza then touch the Options soft key Mom s Cell 3 Touch the next to the Favorite you would like to remove Emergency ry z4 Radio Player Controls Climate Ng Phone More E Remove From Favorites 4 The Options pop up will display touch Remove from Favs ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 Emergency And Towing Assistance The Emergenc y and Towing Assistance Favorite numbers can only be altered These cannot be deleted and the names cannot To change the be changed Emergency or Towing Assistance numbers follow these steps 1 Touch the screen Phonebook soft key from the Phone main 2 Touch the Favorites soft key Scroll to the bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and Towing Assistance Favorites 3 Touch the 4 4 Touch the 4 altered Opt
13. 04 521 Jacking And Changing A Tire URETT KIE STE LOUIE sa qetitadee data 928 Road Tire Installation TIREFIT Storage i nma 523 E JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES 544 EFTIBERLL Beis Com DOD Hs ne Opera nh pans na Preparations For Jump Start 545 TIREFIT Usage Precautions 524 518 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Jump Starting Procedure 546 W TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 552 B FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE 548 Automatic Transmission 0 553 WM SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 550 Manual Transmission 00 553 ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 519 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the center of the instrument panel Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers When the switch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Ha
14. creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up This is normal ee STARTING AND OPERATING 413 Shifting Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears As you To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator fuel economy and performance it should be upshifted as pedal listed in recommended shift speed chart Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration When heavily You should al fi h ing f ee TUUS DIES loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up shift standing position speeds may not apply Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH KM H All Engines Engine Speeds 2 to 3 3to4 4to5 5 to 6 Accel 24 39 34 55 47 76 56 90 Cruise 19 31 27 43 37 60 41 66 414 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Downshifting CAUTION Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recommended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills In addition downshifting at the right time provides better acceleration when you desire to resume speed Downshift progressively Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a e Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears at higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine and clutch systems Any attempt to shift into lower gear with clutch pedal depressed ma
15. Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury STARTING AND OPERATING 445 CAUTION WARNING If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the Continued operation with reduced assist could pose parking brake released a brake system malfunction a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an obtained as soon as possible authorized dealer immediately POWER STEERING If the SERVICE POWER STEERING message el and a steering wheel icon are displayed on the The electric power steering system will give you good EVIC screen it indicates that the vehicle needs vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability to be taken to the dealer for service It is likely in tight spaces The system will vary its assist to provide the vehicle has lost power steering assistance Refer to light efforts while parking and good feel while driving If Fiactronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Understand the electric steering system experiences a fault that reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing assist you will still have the ability to steer the vehic
16. For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup Device Pairing and then Pair a Device the following compound command can be said Setup Device Pairing and Pair a Bluetooth Device For each feature explanation in this section only the compound form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the compound form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will then play some of the options To activate the Uconnect Phone simply press the amp e button and follow the audible prompts for directions Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the Xe button on the steering wheel Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a fe
17. It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained techni cians and genuine parts and cares about your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 amp OGXD e3ax 0220 8i 1910 A 12 3 3 X SEE OWNER S an se MALFUNCTION ITABILITY TOP DOWN Tore SR Lain orr 010533317 6 INTRODUCTION Se WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains
18. Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285 Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing the sunroof attempt to remove the obstruction and then press and hold the switch forward until the sunroof fully closes NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle m
19. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 551 5 Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into the access slot at the front of the shift lever assembly and push and hold the white override release lever down Shift Lever 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 8 Reinstall the shift lever bezel use care to avoid Override Release Tab pinching the wiring and the rubber storage tray liner 6 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position 552 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE NOTE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service Towing Condition WheelsOFF The Ground AUTOMATIC MANUAL TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED Trans in NEUTRAL Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Flatbed ALL OK OK Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed CAUTION DO NOT use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do
20. blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load LL Light load tire C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 462 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tir
21. e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Hon Compass Settings After pressing the Compass Settings soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differ ences and provide the most accurate compass heading 362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 040506040 e Perform Compass Calibration Touch the Calibration soft key to change this setting This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate th
22. flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a If Equipped R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf If Equipped HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro fluorocarbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmen tal Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product with a low GWP Global Warming Potential However ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571 the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning ser The A C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet on the vice be performed by authorized dealer or other service lower right of center console Per
23. for further information Modes Of Operation With Uconnect System If Equipped Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect system screen Refer to Customer Program mable Features Uconnect Access Settings in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion Blind Spot Alert Lights Only When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M view mirror based on a detected object However when the system is operating in RCP the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio volume is reduced Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro priate side view mirror based on a detected object If the turn signal is then activated and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle an audible chime will also be sounded Whenever a turn signal and de tected object are present on the same side at the same time both the visual and audio alerts will be issued In addition to the audible alert the radio if on volume will be reduced NOTE Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system the radio volume is reduced e If the hazard flashers are on the syst
24. handle counterclockwise parking brake before driving the vehicle 10 Finish tightening the wheel bolts Push down on the 12 Stow the jack tools and flat tire wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice Refer to Torque Specifications in this section for proper lug bolt torque If in doubt about the correct tight ness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately 11 Lower the jack until it is free Remove the wheel blocks Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem bly and stow it in the spare tire area Secure the 542 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Road Tire Installation Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 2 To ease the installation process for steel wheels with wheel covers install two wheel bolts on the wheel which are on each side of the valve stem Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the bolt toward the wheel Lightly tighten the wheel bolts 060567721 Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap 1 Valve Stem 4 Wheel Cover 2 Valve Notch 5 Road Wheel 3 Wheel
25. i FIT Sealant and to inflate the tire Use Hose 6 prior to the expiration date printed at the the Sealant Hose clear hose 6 when Tower right hand corner on the bottle label to assure selecting this mode optimum operation of the system Refer to Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT section F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement 0604018634 TIREFIT Expiration Date Location e The Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 are a one tire application use and need to be replaced after each use Always replace these components immediately at your original equipment vehicle dealer e When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form clean water and a damp cloth will remove the material from WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 525 the vehicle or tire and wheel components Once the sealant dries it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded For optimum performance make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the TIREFIT kit You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle tires The kit also comes with two needles located in the Accessory Storage Compartment on the bottom of the air pump for inflating sport balls rafts or similar inflatable items However use only the Air Pump Hose 7 and make sure the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them The TIREFIT Sealant is only in tended to seal punctures less than 4 6 mm diameter i
26. if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these intermit tently and with greater caution Continued 290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CUPHOLDERS Rear Seat Cupholders Front Seat Cupholders The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side by side to provide con venient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintain ing a resting place for the rear occupant s elbows The cupholders are located in the center console forward of the armrest between the front seats Front Cupholders 035138709 Rear Seat Cupholders UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291 STORAGE Glove Compartment The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel Pull on the release handle to open the glove compartment Opened Glove Compartment Console Features An open storage area or cubby bin is located in the center console forward of the shift lever Glove Compartment 292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se There is a storage compartment located under the center Pull upward on the release handle located on the front of console
27. may result in misclassification of the front passenger s weight This may result in serious injury or death in a collision ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 The following requirements must be strictly followed WARNING Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or Unapproved modifications or service procedures to components in any way the passenger seat assembly its related components Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the cushions not designated by Chrysler Group LLC for air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision This the specific model being repaired Always use the could result in death or serious injury to the front correct seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS and or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat CMVSS Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an aftermarket seat cover or cushion e e At no time should any supplemental restraint system Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag SRS component or SRS related component or fastener Jy gator Units be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by Chrysler Group LLC The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag I
28. the indicator illuminates when ON 3 Blower Control Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system There are seven blower speeds available Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation The speeds can be selected using either hard keys or soft keys as follows Hard key The blower speed increases as you turn the control clockwise from the lowest blower setting The blower speed decreases as you turn the knob counter clockwise Soft key Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons 4 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode The indicator illuminates when this fea ture is ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode The blower speed may ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395 increase when Defrost mode is selected If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting 5 Rear Defrost Button Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 15 minutes CAUTION Failure to follow these cautio
29. the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Do not change the forward or rearward position of a vehicle seat where a child restraint is installed as it can loosen the attachments of the car seat Re move the child restraint before adjusting the ve hicle seat position When the vehicle seat has been adjusted reinstall the child restraint When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor ages or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the seat belt in a rear seat Use this simple 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle s seat belt alone 1 Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat 2 Do the child s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back 3 Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder between their neck and arm 4 Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible touching the child s thighs and
30. the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick The range markings will consist of a crosshatch zone which depicts the MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range Adding 1 qt 1L of oil when the reading is at the ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565 low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range CAUTION Do not overfill the engine Overfilling the engine will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This could damage your engine Also be sure the oil fill cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa tion NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection 1 4L Turbo Engine For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified Grade SN or better and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12991 Engine Oil Selection 2 0L And 2 4L Engine For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operatin
31. then dial a number from the dialpad recent calls SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Join Calls in this section Place Retrieve A Call From Hold During an active call touch the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Swap soft key on the Phone main screen Only one call can be placed on hold at a time You can also press the w button to toggle between the active and held phone call 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Join Calls When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Join Calls soft key on the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the w but ton or the end soft key Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call Redial Press the Redial soft key or press the and after the Listening prompt and the following beep say Re dial The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF NOTE T
32. 2 Engine Oil Fill 6 Battery 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 Engine Oil Level Indicator 4 Power Distribution Center Fuses 8 Air Cleaner Filter 560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed e If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if
33. 2 Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the ENGINE START STOP button once 3 The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds 4 If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting press the button again NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal ee STARTING AND OPERATING 409 To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN START STOP Button engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position ENGINE START STOP Button Functions With 3 If the shift lever shift selector is not in PARK the Driver s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal In PARK Or ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two NEUTRAL Position aa ino bou mE LS n 4 se ni nm the The ENGINE START STOP button operates similar to an is aie ga tg ed m nad pioet neengine ignition switch It has four positions OFF ACC RUN W Saut ee on SWIC postion Wie reman dnd START T change the ignition positions without in the ACC position until the shift lever shift selector tarting the vehicle and th follow th is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF E E Eds gee position If the shift leve
34. 2 4L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Gap 0 047 in 1 2 mm Fuel Selection 1 4L Turbo Engine 91 Octane Recommended 87 Octane Acceptable Fuel Selection 2 0L and 2 4L En 87 Octane gine 610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sa Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission 1 4L MOPAR C635 DDCT MTX Transmission Fluid or equivalent Failure to Turbo Engine If Equipped use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission Automatic Transmission 2 0L And MOPAR SP IV Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent Failure to 2 4L Engine If Equipped use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission Manual Transmission If We recommend you use MOPAR C635 DDCT MTX Transmission Fluid Equipped Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 SAE J1703 If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS B MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 612 Required Maintenance 0 613 M A N T E N A N e I S e H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N ie E S Cc H E D U L E S 8 612 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system The oil change indicator system will remind you th
35. 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107 While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recom mended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle CAUTION Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result NOTE A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Continued 108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Continued e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
36. 569 WARNING Continued The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are
37. A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to pro gram while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the hand held trans mitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAIN ING button On some garage door openers devices there may be a lig
38. Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will flash to indicate the system is actively cor recting an undesirable vehicle condition This includes Yaw control traction control and trailer sway control If the lamp remains solid under normal driving conditions your vehicle should be serviced at an authorized dealer The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active STARTING AND OPERATING 457 The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the Traction Control System TCS or trailer sway is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC ram Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously The ESC system may make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activatio
39. ESC system is in FM the Partial Off mode 452 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING e TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations Refer to Vehicle Loading and Trailer Towing in Starting and Operating for further information e If TSC activates while towing a trailer stop the vehicle at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate the trailer sway e Failure to follow these warnings can result in an accident or serious personal injury Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel Hill Start Assist Disable Procedure NOTE Vehicle roll back mitigation will not be present with this feature disabled Hill Start assist can be disabled if desired This procedure applies to vehicles equipped with a manual or Powertech transmission 1 Wheels must be pointed straight ahead on a level
40. Engine X X X X X A MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 615 i A Mileage Or Time Passed Whichever Comes First S S S 8 8 888 8 8s ysis S8 o c Q Q Q Q Q Q jQ je jQ oe jQ N e e e e e e e e e e e e e e T OrYears 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Ii OrKilometers 8 8 8 g g a g 8 8 g s a gei e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Alo r o IS Ia co I O o a o x co e ce T e co o T N T e N o e N q E y r T N N N Replace the spark plugs 2 0L and 2 4L Engine X S Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or X X 6 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever comes first E Change the transmission fluid manual or 1 4L turbo D automatic if using your vehicle for any of the follow U ing trailer towing heavy loading taxi police delivery X X x B service commercial service off road desert opera E tion or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained S speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C 8 L 616 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Sx A IM Mileage Or Time Passed Whichever Comes First S 8 8 8 8 8 88 8 8 S isisisg N Q e Q ye Q Q Q Q jQ jQ jQ jQ Qe jQ T amp S S IS S 8 S amp 8 Jg E TS T T N Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 N OrKilometers 8 S 8 8 s 8 8 8 8 8 ge 8 8 8
41. High Beam D3S Bi Xenon Headlamp Front Park Turn Signal 7442NALL Lamp Sidemarker Lamp 194 Front Fog Lamp H11 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL LED Serviced at Autho rized Dealer Rear Tail Stop Turn Sig nal Lamp LED Serviced at Autho rized Dealer Backup Lamp 7440 License Lamp 168 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603 BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process Headlamps Halogen Headlamps Can be serviced by removing the cap from the backside of the headlamp Remove the HIR2 bulb from the con nector and replacing the bulb Reinstall bulb and cap High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service WARNING A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electro cution if not serviced properly See your authorized dealer for service 604 MAINTAINING YOUR
42. I need directions 17 I m lost 18 See you later Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the mobile phone OFF ON Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Voice Tree Uconnect Hands Free Calling Uconnect Hands Free Calling Available commands while phone call is in progress These commands can be spoken from any screen while a call is active after pushing the Uconnect voice command button a VR on the steering whoo These commands can be spoken from any screen after pushing the Uconnect Phone button Vy on the steering wheel Number associated wth entry is dialed Dial Tones for numbers stored in for 12344 Voicemail are sent Password are sent call list will Smith with all stored numbers 0305020375 Hn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 NOTE 1 You can replace John Smith with any name in your mobile or favorite phone book You can also say Send a message to John Smith and the system will ask you which phone number you want to send a message to for John Smith You can r
43. IN EMERGENCIES ME 4 Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 onto the valve stem 5 Uncoil the Power Plug 8 and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet NOTE Do not remove foreign objects e g screws or nails from the tire C Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated Tire e Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE FIT kit NOTE Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL e After pressing the Power Button 4 the sealant white fluid will flow from the Sealant Bottle 1 through the Sealant Hose 6 and into the tire NOTE Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire If the sealant white fluid does not flow within 0 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn Off the TIREFIT kit Disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem Make sure the valve stem is free of debris Reconnect the Sealant Hose 6 to the valve stem Check that the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode Press the Power Button 4 to turn On the TIREFIT kit 2 Connect the Power Plug 8 to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle if available Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the TIREFIT kit 3 The Sealant Bottle 1 may be empty due to previous use Call for assistance
44. List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the Sve button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile other or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Uconnect Phonebook Names e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available To call one of the names in the list press the Sve but ton during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three
45. Listening prompt and the following beep say Call John Doe Mobile ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 3 The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated with John Doe or if there are multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe Call Controls The touchscreen allows you to control the following call features e e e e e Answer End Ignore Hold unhold Mute unmute Transfer the call to from the phone Swap two active calls Join two active calls together Touch Tone Number Entry 1 Touch the Phone soft key 2 Touch the Dial soft key E The Touch Tone screen will be displayed BC Use the numbered soft keys to enter the number and touch Call To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition VR press the EVR button on your steering wheel while in a call and say Send 1234 or you can say Send Voicemail Password if Voicemail password is stored in your mo bile phonebook 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Recent Calls You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the following call types 10 10 Nw 68 49 FM 91 7 54 o Recent calls gt Axel Schweiss Buddy s Pizza 248 990 6543 James Buttler D Dennett D ey OFF More Radio Player Controls Climate Recent Calls Incoming Calls Outgoing Calls e Missed Calls e All Calls These can be accessed by touchin
46. None None None None None 2nd Flash 1st Flashing Rear ing Arc Cen None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash 2nd Flash 1st Flashing ter Rear ing ing Arc None None None None None 2nd Flash 1st Flashing Right Rear ing 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE mM Enabling And Disabling ParkSense amp ParkSense can be enabled and disabled using the Uconnect System The available choices are Off Sound Only or Sound and Display Refer to Uconnect Set tings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the ParkSense soft key is pressed to disable the system the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST SYS TEM OFF message for approximately five seconds Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System During vehicle start up when the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system has detected a fault condition the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the WIPE OFF REAR PARK ASSIST SENSORS SER VICE PARK ASSIST SENSORS or SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EV
47. Play by Category Find Play by Name Find Re vehicle cently Found Where to or Go Home WARNING 2 You can say Find Nearest then Restaurant Fuel Transit Lodging Shopping Bank Enter eIt is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or tainment Recreation Attractions Commu outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in nity Auto Services Hospitals Parking Air these areas are more likely to be seriously injured port Police Stations Fire Stations or Auto or killed Dealers Do not allow people to ride in any area of your NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat face and shaded grey belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Power Seats If Equipped Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward Some models may be equipped with a power driver s The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward seat The power seat switch is located on the outboard Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will side of the seat near the floor Use the switch to move the move in the direction of the switch Release the switch seat up down forward or rearward when the desired position ha
48. Prepare For The Appointment 621 Service Contract 0 0 0 0000 eee eee 623 Prepare A List sse cope a RR Pad 621 B WARRANTY INFORMATION 624 Be Reasonable With Requests 621 B MOPARGPARTS een 625 B IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE 621 Bi REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS 625 Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 622 In The 50 United States And Washington D C llle 625 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 622 In Mexico Contact 0 0 0 000 0000 00s 623 Di Canada ee E PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS 620 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M ll DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM Traction Grades cee ti aee oea ta 00000 628 TIRE QUALITY GRADES 627 Treadweati xem hire veo vu S a 627 Temperature Grades llle 628 en F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 621 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an acci
49. Radio Mode MP3 Audio Play 2i erre nee 370 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 373 Enter Browse Button CD Mode For MP3 WMA Play 375 INFO Button CD Mode For MP3 WMA Play 375 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 376 Operation Instructions Universal Serial Bus USB iis oda pe ERES ERRAT UP ai ds 376 DOCULITY se ceo aces e cem eu ee ea ee 377 CD PLAYER IF EQUIPPED 377 CD Player Operating Instructions 378 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Sx Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And Bl iPod USB MP3 CONTROL WITH Uconnect VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED 378 Connecting The iPod Or External USB DEVICE is TIT 379 Using This Feature sere ens 380 Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons 380 Play Mod ss sre toco dors Hone en peg ta 381 List Or Browse Mode lisse 382 Bluetooth Streaming Audio BISA 384 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS 385 Radio Operation 000 386 CD Player cem Remy meme es 386 E CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE 387 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 ll RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES B CLIMATE CONTROLS 0 0 Manual Heating And Air Conditioning If Equipped eese uer ede Satha
50. Recline Adjustment 223 PHONG ied care rama PESO PEG edd 188 Manual Seat Height Adjustment If General Information 6 199 Equipped sess desate st sieges ds 224 E VOICE COMMAND Uconnect 200 199 Heated Seats If Equipped 224 Voice Command System Operation 199 Head Restraints 000000 227 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Folding Rear Seat 93 seem mes 229 Turn signals iaa cage hae ES Bok ess 239 E TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 231 Lane Change Assist llle 239 B LIGEIS virer ERRARE doe es eee dO 234 High Low Beam Switch 240 Headlight Switch 000 0 234 ElashzIo P ss i rao aste a oe e ke 240 E Automatic Headlights If Equipped 235 Front Map Reading Lights 240 Headlights On With Wipers Available With Interior Lights 2 iter ce xA kaa 241 Automatic Headlights Only 2 ese nexa 235 E WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS 243 Headlight Time Delay 235 Intermittent Wiper System o oo aoua 244 B m no eal iu ut 6 Wiper Operation mu iemaisa Da sanea is 244 Daytime Running Lights DRL 237 Mist Features sca Rn Rec 245 Lights On Reminder eee 237 Windshield Washers gt ccsa ciesa sosp
51. Removing Slack From Belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 WARNING 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tion If necessary slide the latch plate down the injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdo WARNING men Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt may not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immedi ately and have it fixed Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing comfortable and not resting on your neck The retrac etc or if the air bag deployed tor will withdraw any slack in the belt 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver
52. STARTING AND OPERATING 483 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 0 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will 484 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pres
53. STARTING AND OPERATING 497 WARNING Continued 1 Press the fuel filler door release switch located on the driver s side door trim Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main tenance Have the exhaust system inspected every 2 Open the fuel filler door and remove the fuel filler time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal cap conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the locking fuel filler door on the right side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle Fuel Filler Cap 498 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE In certain cold conditions ice may prevent the fuel door from opening If this occurs lightly push on the fuel un Continued door to break the ice buildup and re release the fuel door To avad fuel spillage and overfilling do not top using the inside release button Do not pry on the door off the fuel tank after filling 3 ws cap wy tether on fill door to prevent damage to WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the CAUTION vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is e Damage to the fuel system or emission control being filled system could
54. Settings Cancel Okay Uconnect SETTINGS The Uconnect system uses a combination of soft and hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features Hard Keys Hard Keys are located below the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel In addition there is a Scroll Enter control knob located on the right side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351 change settings i e 30 60 90 press the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting i e ON OFF Soft Keys Soft Keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touchscreen Customer Programmable Features Uconnect System 8 4 Settings Press the More soft key then press the Settings soft key to display the menu setting screen In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display Clock Safety Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start Engine Off Operation Compass Settings Audio Phone Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time When making a selection press the soft key to enter the desired mode Once in the desired mode press and release the preferred setting until a check mark appears next to the set
55. Start mode ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 e For security power window and power sunroof operation if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shutdowns the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the START STOP button vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go or insert the key and turn it to the RUN position vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go NOTE The message Remote Start Active Push Start Button vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go or Remote Start Active Key to Run vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go will display in the EVIC until you push the START button or tu
56. The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes objectionable increase blower speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side win dows Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur e Automatic Temperature Controls ATC will automati cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield When this occurs recirculation will be unavailable 402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter The climate control system filters outside air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for filter replacement instructions STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS B STARTING PROCEDURES 55 9 Re 407 Manual Transmission If Equipped 407 Automatic Transmission If Equipped 408 Keyles
57. The minutes will highlight 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 5 To exit press the TIME button or press the BACK button to return to the previous menu The clock can also be set by pressing the MENU button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the MENU button until CLOCK appears in the display Using the ENTER BROWSE button select SET TIME and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 NOTE Time format has the options of 12HR or 24HR Selecting one of these options will change the way the clock is displayed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting The Bass Mid Range Treble Balance Or Fade To set the Bass Mid Range Treble Balance or Fade settings press the AUDIO button to access the Audio sub menu The Audio sub menu can also be reached by pressing the MENU button until AUDIO appears in the display Press the ENTER BROWSE button to select the AUDIO men
58. USB AUX Connector Port UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379 Center Console USB AUX Connector Port Cable Routing NOTE The center console will have a position where the iPod or consumer electronic audio device cable can be routed through without damaging the cable when clos ing the lid A factory cut out space for the cable to be routed may be located in the base of the center console on either the front or side This allows routing of the cable 380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M without damaging it while closing the lid If a cut out is not available in the center console base route the cable away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the lid to close without damaging the cable Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s iPod USB MP3 control system iPod or external USB device may take a few minutes to connect the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE If the audio device battery is completely dis charged it may not communicate with the iPod USB MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod USB MP3 control system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using an iPod cable or an external USB device to connect to the USB port The audio device can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist tr
59. UconnectPhone com or call 1 800 465 2001 English or 1 800 387 9983 French For additional information on Uconnect e US residents visit http www DriveUconnect com or call 1 877 855 8400 e Canadian Residents visit http www DriveUconnect ca or call 1 800 465 2001 Eng lish or 1 800 387 9983 French Uconnect amp Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws including laws regarding phone use Your at tention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious in
60. a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con tact anything that can burn 576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine perfor mance and cause serious damage to the engine e Damage to the cat
61. against the wheel Road Tire Installation 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 544 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 2 Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded lug bolt torque If in doubt about the correct tightness end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel Lightly have them checked with a torque wrench by your tighten the wheel bolts authorized dealer or service station 5 Lower the jack until it is free Remove the wheel MARRA blocks Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack bly and stow it in the spare tire area Secure the do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has assembly using the means provided Release the park been lowered Failure to follow this warning may ing brake before driving the vehicle result in personal injury 6 After 25 miles 40 km check the wheel bolt torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are properly seated against the wheel 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 4 Finish tightening the wheel bolts Push down on the JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES wrench while at the end of the handle for increased Jf your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump leverage Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in each wheel bolt has been tightened twice Refer to another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
62. all child restraint systems will be installed as described here 3 Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the car seat Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat ing position If the child restraint has a tether strap connect it to the top tether anchorage See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for direc tions to attach a tether anchor 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 6 Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufac turer s instructions Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other oc
63. and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood e Charging System Telltale This telltale shows the status of the electrical charging system If the telltale stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system telltale remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an authorized dealer e If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Telltale This telltale informs you of a problem with the X Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If the telltale comes on while driving have the sys tem checked by an authorized dealer es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 e e e If a problem is detected the telltale will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The telltale should turn off If the telltale remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an authorized dealer for service as soon as p
64. armrest In addition the 12 Volt power outlet the armrest to open the storage compartment USB and Aux jack are located here WARNING Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Driving with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision Center Console UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293 Door Storage The door panels contain storage areas Rear Door Trim Storage 035265528 a Front Door Trim Storage 294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Passenger Seat Storage If Equipped Some models may be equipped with storage under the front passenger seat cushion Pull upward on the seat cushion loop to open the storage compartment Passenger Seat Cushion Loop ___ 035265531 Passenger Seat Cushion Storage Compartment UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295 Rear Seat Armrest Storage If Equipped CARGO AREA FEATURES For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the Cargo Area 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat If armrest Lift upward on the latch to open the storage Equipped compartment The 60 40 split folding rear seat provides cargo carrying versatility The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling the mmm seatback loops between the seatbacks and the bolsters When the seats are folded down they provide a continu ous nearly flat extension of the load floor Rear Armrest Storage
65. bak Heide d ed x dae ee ea a 12 Key Sentry Immobilizer 19 Knee Bolster e230 id Peete hei eG ten RR ebd 61 Lane Change and Turn Signals 239 Lane Change Assist s sca wie acra es 239 Lap Shoulder Belts 0000000004 51 Latches 2 2 e n ex Ray es 111 Lateh Plates seen emt s due x Rn 53 Lead Free Gasoline 2l 492 Leaks Fluid echo rere ees 111 Life of Ties isr crr re e c ints 478 Light Bulbs i ea cS See ee Eee ux a Ges 111 Lig hits ss Ades eaten tee a duos aa Mer i 111 Puer H 68 Alarm sc 203 kk er eR hic ex eas 316 Antilock uere eem sine as dO a 318 Automatic Headlights illus 235 Brake Warning ss dere px dE oe gla 313 Bulb Replacement ss scese ies awt eremi ags 603 CEUISe s onere pc Enan gals bre ent ahha eg ee ee 320 Daytime Running 0 0 0 0 e eens 237 Dimmer Switch Headlight 238 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 458 EXEO uar Sd aoe dera dh Ba deg EE RR 111 FOS 4gdoc Seabed hae died oie e ener ee 238 Hazard Warning Flasher 519 Headlights so 40 6 we eatin te hee ths oo Ye el 234 Headlights On Reminder 237 Headlights On With Wipers 235 Headlight Switch 00 000000000 234 High Beams sexe Re erdum soo 240 High Beam Indicator o cs co cessare 312 High Beam Low Beam Select 240 Illuminated Entry 000
66. be displayed e If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON If one or more tires have low pressure Inflate Tire To XX is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different color than the other tire pressure value 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e If the Tire Pressure system requires service Service Tire Pressure System is displayed um aX 30 x Low Pressure Spare Tire STORED MESSAGES Tire Pressure Analog Display Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be reset Press and release the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS under Starting and Operating for further information Fuel Economy button until the Fuel Economy icon is high lighted Press the RIGHT arrow button and the next screen will display the following Hy Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow e Average Fuel Economy e Range To Empty RTE Current Fuel Economy UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343 n 438 mi 35 mpg 4 438 miles 35 mpg gt m 28 Hol old gt to reset Hold to reset FUEL ECONOMY Fuel Economy Analog Display Fuel Economy Digital Display FUEL ECONOMY 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The EVIC has the c
67. be installed properly by trained personnel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC i 14PFD41 126 AB Second Edition Printed in U S A
68. bolt 3 Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel Install the cover by hand ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 543 snapping the cover over the two wheel bolts Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover 4 Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel Lightly tighten the wheel bolts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 5 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 6 Finish tightening the wheel bolts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice Refer to Torque Specifications in this section for proper lug bolt torque If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station Lower the jack until it is free Remove the wheel blocks Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem bly and stow it in the spare tire area Secure the assembly using the means provided Release the park ing brake before driving the vehicle After 25 miles 40 km check the wheel bolt torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are properly seated
69. button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will m jump backward or forward respectively for five sec onds Use the SEEK button during play mode to jump to the start of the current track Pressing the SEEK gt gt button during play mode will jump to the next track in the list or press the VR button and say Next or Previous Track While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps 382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME List Or Browse Mode e e to the next screen of data for that track Once all screens have been viewed the last INFO button press will go back to the play mode screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio device mode to repeat the current playing track or press the VR button and say Repeat ON or Repeat Off Press the SHUFFLE button to play the selections on the USB iPod device in random order to provide an interesting change of pace To stop Shuffle Mode press the SHUFFLE button again To turn SHUFFLE On Off with Voice Commands press the c VR button wait for the beep and say Shuffle On or Shuffle Off During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below wi
70. capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Overloading The load carrying components springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR 502 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier suspension compo nents do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limi
71. child restraint owner s manual for more information Can the head restraints be removed Yes All head restraints may be removed THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are e found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback below the anchorage sym bols on the seatback They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion Jj 022636667 Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Locating The LATCH Anchorages ln addition there are tether strap anchorages J amp behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window They are found under a plastic cover with the tether anchorage symbol on it Tether Strap Anchorages LATCH compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage Forward facing child restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it
72. displayed in the EVIC The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish and the LOW TIRE PRESSURE and Inflate Tire to XX messages will turn off once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information Service TPMS Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime and display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM mes sage for a minimum of five seconds If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 488 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefor
73. driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors ee STARTING AND OPERATING 491 NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not moni tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warn ing limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire The Inflate Tire to XX message and the graphic with the low tire pressure flashing or in a different color will be dis played However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM mes sage for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure values For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light wil
74. e The front passenger seat is occupied by a rearward facing infant seat or e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EEEEEEEEEEEEEEIEIEIEIEIEIEIEIEIEIEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEENI Front Passenger Seat Front Passenger Air WARNING Occupant Status Bag Classification Rearward facme infant Reduced power Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of seat 5 depl a ent an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child Child melding a ebal ar full power deployment 12 years or younger including a child in a rearward a forward facing child OR reduced power facing infant seat pee oro deployment Children 12 years or younger should always ride Properly seated adult Full power deployment buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child OR reduced power restraint deployment Unoccupied seat Reduced power The OCM works with the OCS sensor to determine the deployment front passenger seat occupant s most probable classifica tion The OCS sensor estimates the weight on the front It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult passenger seat and where that weight is located The allowing a full power front passenger air bag deploy OCM communicates the classification status to the ORC ment Nev
75. es The front passenger seat is equipped with Flip n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage refer to Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for additional informa tion Make sure that objects inside the Flip n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage bin do not interfere with the latch before closing the seat In addition after closing the Front Passenger Seat Storage bin make sure the front passenger seat cushion is pushed downward and fully latched to the base Over stuffing the storage bin may result in misclassification of the front passenger s weight The passenger seat assembly contains critical compo nents that may affect front passenger Advanced Air Bag inflation In order for the OCS to properly classify a front seat passenger the OCS components must function as designed Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components assembly or to the seat cover If the seat trim cover or cushion needs service for any reason take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only Chrysler Group LLC approved seat accessories may be used WARNING Make sure that objects inside the Flip n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage bin do not interfere with the latch before closing the seat In addition after closing the Front Passenger Seat Storage bin make sure the front passenger seat cushion is pushed downward and fully latched to the base Overstuff ing the storage bin or a not fully latched passenger seat cushion
76. feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster if equipped Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped Sun Visor Slide On Rod Feature If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor To use This feature allows for additional flexibility in position the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the ing the visor to block out the sun mirror cover upward The light will turn on automati 4 Fold down the sun visor cally Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light 2 Unclip the visor from the center clip m 3 Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to extend it 030436290 Illuminated Vanity Mirror 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M BLIND SPOT MONITORING BSM IF EQUIPPED The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system uses two radar based sensors located inside the rear bumper fascia to detect highway licensable vehicles automobiles trucks motorcycles etc that enter the blind spot zones from the rear front side of the vehicle Rear Detection Zones When the vehicle is started the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational Automatic Transmission Vehicles The BSM system sensors
77. hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the hand held trans mitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed 278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remaining steps Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitt
78. if ee ee A E eee ed increase or decrease the brightness of the door handle equipped lights and ambient light located in the overhead console 031463857 Door Handle Ambient Light Dimmer Instrument Panel Dimmer ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 Dome Light Position Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Interior Light Defeat OFF Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer EVIC if equipped and radio when the position lights or headlights are on WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON RUN or ACC position The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column Orr X9 Di uii T PA LO 031563089 Windshield Wiper Washer Control 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multifunc tion lev
79. in the original hand held transmit ter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281 e Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance WARNING Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger ous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal trans ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety fea tures Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance 282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful i
80. indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position or cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position if equipped with Keyless Enter N Go To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU but ton To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the fol lowing procedure Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Without pressing the brake pedal press the ENGINE START STOP button and place the ignition in the ON RUN position do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Without pressing the brake pedal press the ENGINE START STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF LOCK position Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUME
81. latest phone paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR commands to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio e Show Paired Phones e Connect My Phone Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device 1 Touch the Player soft key to begin 2 Change the Source to Bluetooth 3 Touch the Bluetooth soft key to display the Paired Audio Devices screen 4 Touch the Add Device soft key NOTE If there is no device currently connected with the system a pop up will appear 5 Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled audio device When prompted on the device enter the PIN shown on the Uconnect screen 6 Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting 7 When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device Selecting Yes will make this device the highest priority This device will take precedence over other paired devices within range NOTE For devices which are not made a favorite the device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest device paired will have the higher priority 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M You can also use the following VR command to bring up 4 Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen a list of paired audio devices e Show Paired P
82. list When a browse subcategory is selected and contains no contents No items found will be displayed on the screen This message times out after three seconds and will take you back to the submenu you were previ ously in CAUTION Leaving the iPod or external USB device or any supported device anywhere in the vehicle in ex treme heat or cold can alter the operation or dam age the device Follow the device manufacturer s guidelines Placing items on the iPod or external USB device or connections to the iPod or external USB device in the vehicle can cause damage to the device and or to the connectors 384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME WARNING Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB device while driving Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the Uconnect phone system Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons To enter BISA mode press either AUX button on the radio or press the VR button and say Bluetooth Stream ing Audio Play Mode When switched to BISA mode some audio devices can start playing music over the vehicle s audio system but some devices require the music to be initiated on the device first then it will get streamed to the Uconnect phone system Seven devices can be paired to the Uconnect phone system but just one can be selected
83. locked into 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side position the seat will not provide the proper sta bility for child seats and or passengers An improp erly latched seat could cause serious injury of the instrument panel e The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system 031364302 Hood Release Lever 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety 3 Lift upward on the hood prop rod to release it from the catch to the left The safety catch is located under the stowage retainer center front edge of the hood 031365523 060635505 Hood Prop Rod Hood Safety Latch 4 Place the hood prop rod in the hood slot to secure the hood in the open position 031365522 Hood Prop Rod Slot UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi mately 6 in 15 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If t
84. may require servicing or replacement in the future 7 564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter vals Do not use chemical flushes in these compo nents as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air conditioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot will improve the accuracy of
85. noise is normal and will not damage the transmission 426 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain or traveling into strong head winds use the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section for further information to select a lower gear Under these conditions using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup During extremely cold temperatures the transmission will not operate if the oil temperature is 22 F 30 C or below Allow the engine to idle briefly with the transmis sion in PARK in order to warm the fluid Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level Instrument Cluster Messages Messages will be displayed in the instrument cluster to alert the driver when certain unusual conditions occur These messages are described below ee STARTING AND OPERATING 427 MESSAGE DESCRIPTION GEAR NOT AVAILABLE In AutoStick mode the gear selected by the driver is not available due to a fault condition See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and service SHIFT NOT ALLOWED The gear position requested by the driver is currently blocked This occurs if RE VERSE is requested while moving at 6 mph 10 km h or faster if DRIVE is re quested while moving b
86. not attach to front or rear suspension components Dam age to your vehicle may result from improper towing If you must use the accessories wipers defroster etc while being towed the key must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 553 Automatic Transmission Automatic transmission vehicles must be towed wit all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed CAUTION DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain will result Do not dolly tow this vehicle Use of a towing dolly can cause significant damage to your vehicle Dam age from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re quirements can cause severe transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered un der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle s battery is discharged refer to Shift Lever Override in this section for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission Out of PARK for loading onto a flatbed truck Manual Transmission The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed e Manual transmission vehicles can also be flat towed all four wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEUTRAL CAUTION e DO NOT flat tow any disabled vehicle if condition is related t
87. not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly e Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and or Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING Do not allow people to r
88. not their stomach 5 Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip If the answer to any of these questions was no then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle If the child is using the lap shoulder belt check belt fit periodi cally and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly WARNING Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back In a crash the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly which may result in serious injury or death A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an X Below Child Restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Weight of the LATCH Seat Belt Only LATCH Seat Belt Top Child Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Restraint Only Top Tether Anchor Rear Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Rear Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Forward Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Forward Facin
89. or Eve button on your steering wheel when the system is listening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone NOTE You must have Bluetooth enabled on your mobile phone to complete this procedure e The vehicle must be in PARK To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing 1 Touch the Phone soft key on the screen to begin 2 If there is no phone currently connected with the system a pop up will appear ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 68 49 P FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out e Touch the Add Device soft key e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone When prompted on the up reme e phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Would you like to pair a phone Uconnect screen See step 4 to complete the process e DL Radio More Mobile Phone Pairing 3 Select Yes to begin the pairing process Then search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen e If No is selected touch the Settings soft key from the Uconnect Phone main screen 170
90. or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Lock Switch 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry system For further information refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle If you press the power door lock switch while the key is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from acciden tally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle Removing the key from the ignition or closing the door will allow the locks to operate If a door is open and the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer per written request of the customer Please see your authorized dealer for service Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h The transmission is in N
91. passenger Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags SABIC air bags SABs Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Supplemental Passenger Side Knee Air Bag and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on several factors including the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver and Front Passenger Knee Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on several factors including the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver and Front Passenger Knee Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver and Front Passenger Knee Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce sub stantial vehicle damage for example some pole colli sions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced
92. prona tutos up cn tu sra shed rune centre c be meten hem oy erm afer ihe Pe onmi ten Pid e cc ita i i Siem Entar massaga trom fired Vat provided massagra by system or say roos List to hoar aft 18 downloaded defined massages from phone sent to with entry Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and are underlined In the shaded boxes 0475016870 aes NOTE 1 You can replace John Smith with any name in your mobile or favorite phone book You can also say Send a message to John Smith and the system will ask you which phone number you want to send a message to for John Smith You can replace Mobile with Home Work or Other You can replace Incoming Calls with Outgoing Calls or Missed Calls B O1 a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect system is equipped with this feature and the mobile phone supports messaging over Bluetooth You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number supported by your Mobile phone You can replace 4 with any message number shown on the screen If your phone does not support phonebook download or call log download over Bluetooth then these commands will return a response that the contact does not exist in the phonebook 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Hands Free Calling
93. refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity 476 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equi
94. remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners abrasives or polishing compounds They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH Used on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish CAUTION Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPARG Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel 592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue Do not use any harsh solvents or any other f
95. repair is neces sary 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition is placed in the ON RUN position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 11 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped 5 12 Fuel Gauge This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con trol ESC is off The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON RUN position 13 Speedometer Indicat
96. result from using an improper fuel e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impu in violation of most state and federal fire regula rities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting tions and may cause the malfunction indicator light to turn on e A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunction Indi cator Light MIL to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system e A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn on Continued eee STARTING AND OPERATING 499 NOTE 3 Insert finger into half circle opening and pull flap open e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank to access the cable is full Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you hear one click This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened If the gas cap is not tighten properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled Manual Fuel Filler Door Release If you are unable to open the fuel filler door use the manual fuel filler door release Release Cable Access Door Cut Out 1 Open the trunk 2 Locate the release cable access door cut out on the right side of the trunk trim 500 STARTING AND OPERATING 4 Pul
97. running hot This may occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi nated you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire 28 Selectable EVIC Information This area of the cluster will display selectable informa tion such as compass outside temperature etc For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC If Equipped 29 Electronic Speed Control Indicator e Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator This light will turn on when the electronic O speed control is ON For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator This light will turn on when the electronic O speed control is SET For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle 30 Amber Electroni
98. shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and b IL ee ee run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off tales These telltales include e Low Fuel Telltale When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 0 gal 7 5 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added e Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator Se se iv This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind shield washer fluid is low e Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale If Equipped This telltale indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot This may occur with severe usage such as trailer towing CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Telltale illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If the Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EVIC Red Telltales This area will show reconfigurable red telltales These telltales include Door Ajar This telltale turns on when one or more doors are ajar The telltale will show which doors are ajar e Oil Pressure Warning Telltale A7 This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle
99. single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid Windshield Washers To use the washer push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In
100. soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after NOTE soaking with warm water e You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive by pressing the rear window defroster switch a window cleaners on the interior surface of the second time window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393 Uconnect 8 4 Climate Controls If Equipped Soft Keys Hard Keys Soft keys are accessible on the Uconnect 8 4 system screen The hard keys are located below the Uconnect 8 4 screen in the center of the instrument panel a a gun is AUTO IC x AIC M K l i 044435866 E e 3 8 ee 4 5 Uconnect 8 4 Automatic Temperature Controls Soft Keys Automatic Climate Controls Hard Keys 394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Button Descriptions Applies To Both Hard keys And Soft keys 1 A C Button Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning A C setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON Performing this function will cause the automatic opera tion to switch into manual mode and the AUTO indicator will turn off 2 Recirculation Button Press and release to change the current setting
101. soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e Flash Headlights With Lock When this feature is selected the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection touch the Flash Head lights with Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Doors amp Locks After pressing the Doors amp Locks soft key the following settings will be available e Auto Unlock On Exit When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Flash Headlight With Lock When this feature is selected the front and headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To make your selection touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft key un
102. starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 24 Oil Pressure Warning Light TH this light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 25 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light es If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 26 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL LS The Malfunction Indicator Li
103. surface 2 Automatic transmission should be in PARK 3 Place manual transmission in NEUTRAL if equipped 4 Begin with the ignition OFF ee STARTING AND OPERATING 453 5 Engage park brake 6 Start engine and wait for ESC OFF lamp to turn off 7 Apply brake pedal 8 Turn steering wheel 200 degrees counter clockwise just over half a turn from center position Press the ESC off button four times 9 Rotate the steering wheel back to center and continue in a clockwise direction until 200 degrees past center 10 Turn the ignition to OFF position 11 If procedure was done correctly ESC malfunction lamp will flash four times after engine starts 12 Procedure must be completed within 90 seconds 13 Repeat the condition to re enable Hill Start Assist HSA HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 3 manual transmission 3 5 automated manual transmission or 8 grade or greater automatic transmission hill Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK 454 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING There may be situations on minor hills wit
104. switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature vehicle controlled and can start at any time the ignition e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires EE E pasion disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions e You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot 578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Ss Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains visible sediment have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant antifreeze conforming to MS 12106 Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Some vehicles require special t
105. the driver to select a variety of useful Stored Warning Messages information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following e Radio Info 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The system allows the driver to select information by e UP Arrow Button pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll upward through the main menu and sub menus Fuel Economy Trip A Trip B Stored Messages Screen Set Up C e VR X e DOWN Arrow Button Press and release the DOWN arrow button to V scroll downward through the main menu and sub menus Fuel Economy Trip A Trip B Stored Messages Screen Set Up 040963939 EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons Four Button EVIC Controls UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 e RIGHT Arrow Button Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to access the information screens or sub menu The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the screens of a main menu item Press and hold cluster and consists of the follow sections the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds to 9 dere lt a JUD reset displayed selected features that can be reset LEFT Arrow Button E Ken ral K Press the LEFT arrow button to return to the B a 1 main menu from an info screen or sub menu 2n i oe 4 438 mies 35 mpg P Zi item
106. the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears The transmission shift lever has PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL DRIVE and AutoStick shift positions Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control ee STARTING AND OPERATING 431 refer to AutoStick in this section for further informa tion Moving the shift lever rearward or forward while in the AutoStick position beside the DRIVE position will manually select the transmission gear and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1 2 3 etc Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK P This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may shift the transmission into PARK first and then apply
107. the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or improperly installed A gASCAP message will be dis played in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the trip odometer RESET button to turn off the message If the problem ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561 persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration C nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing For states that require an Inspection and Mainte Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle
108. the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi cult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade 432 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 433 WARNING Continued e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle whi
109. the same time Start paring procedure on device See device manual for instructions Select Uconnect on the device and enter the four digit Personal Identification Number PIN displayed on radio into your mobile phone Dial By Saying A Number Press the w button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 151 1234 5555 The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call By Saying A Name e e Press the w button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say john doe or john doe mobile where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook e The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If
110. the setting and turn it on or off Shuffle and Repeat cannot be active at the same time If one is selected while the other is currently active the currently active one will be changed to OFF These settings will be dependent of the current source If shuffle is on in iPod moving to CD will not have shuffle On unless it was previously set to On Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373 Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to di
111. the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags are located in the outboard side of the front seats and the rear seats if equipped with rear seat SAB NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Air Bag System Components 2 Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Air Bag Warning Light Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Knee Impact Bolsters Driver Advanced Front Air Bag Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC WARNING Front and Side I tS M dde MN E MD ER No objects should be placed over or near the air bag Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch on the instrument panel because any such objects and could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers Advanced Front Air Bag Features or at
112. the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and gt After the Listeni ng prompt and the following beep Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area say Roadside Assistance or say Towing Assis tance 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE The roadside towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 800 363 4869 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for out side Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC 24 Hour Roadside Assistance coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour Roadside Assistance Card Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some services re quire immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile p
113. to connect to them quickly NOTE Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via Bluetooth for messaging features to work properly Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicles audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone For Uconnect customer support visit the following web site US residents visit www UconnectPhone com or call 1 877 855 8400 e Canadian residents visit www UconnectPhone com or call 1 800 465 2001 English or 1 800 387 9983 French ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws including laws regarding phone use Your at tention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or bri
114. to repeated launches PRESS BRAKE in stop and go traffic Pull over and allow the transmission to cool in NEUTRAL until TRANS COOL READY TO DRIVE is displayed TRANS HOT STOP The transmission driving clutch has overheated Pull over and shift the transmis SAFELY SHIFT TO P sion into PARK and allow the vehicle to cool until TRANS COOL READY TO DRIVE is displayed SERVICE TRANSMIS A transmission fault has been detected See your authorized dealer for diagnosis SION and service ee STARTING AND OPERATING 429 MESSAGE DESCRIPTION SERVICE SHIFTER A shift lever fault has been detected See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and service ENGAGE PARK BRAKE The sensor that confirms PARK engagement is not functioning properly Engage the parking brake to ensure that the vehicle will not roll when in PARK Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode some gears will be unavailable The transmission will operate only in a certain select set of gears such as 1st 2nd 3rd and Reverse or 1st 3rd 5th and Reverse or 2nd 4th and 6th with no Reverse PARK and NEUTRAL will continue to be available The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer f
115. to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Flash Headlights With Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Headlight Illumination On Approach This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through Uconnect amp To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with
116. vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low 472 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat ing speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speed
117. will be available e Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto On Driver Heated Seat amp Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start If Equipped When this feature is selected the driver s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C To make your selection touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key until a ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361 check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Engine Off Options After pressing the Engine Off Options soft key the fol lowing settings will be available e Engine Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft key Then touch the back arrow soft key
118. with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens Turning ParkView On Or Off With Touchscreen Radio 1 Turn the Radio on 2 Press the More soft key 3 Press the Settings soft key 4 5 Press the Safety amp Driving Assistance soft key Press the check box soft key next to Parkview Backup Camera to enable disable The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights and storage for sunglasses Universal Garage Door Opener HomeLink and power sunroof switches may also be included if equipped Overhead Console 272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Front Map Reading Lights The lights also turn on when a door is opened The lights Lights are mounted in the overhead console Each light eae OE a eens can be turned on by pressing the lens Sunglass Bin Door To turn the lights off press the lens a second time At the front of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compart ment access is a push push design Push the chrome pad on the door to open Push the chrome pad on the door to close Front Map Reading Lights 033365527 Sunglass Bin Door GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motor ized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery UNDERSTAN
119. your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty PARRING ERARE distances Therefore after driving through stand ing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes e Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your pas sengers and others around you Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK or manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear Parking Brake The parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely STARTING AND OPERATING 443 When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate NOTE When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transmission is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not s
120. 0 0000 0 23 Instrument Cluster occ ck ect Re tee x 234 Intensity Controles cs emere e 241 IritertOt i ss ane agai E eds Ee a ea ea es 241 en INDEX 639 License cuia we SG Paw ES Lae ee i 606 Lights On Reminder 2050 237 bow Fuel 3 iue Sogo dS eh tae es Rs 316 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 318 Oil Pressure 23d bade vordere tes 317 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 243 Passing ssa e gea rh e LR eg 240 Reading so yea date eens Pass mg s 240 Seat Belt Reminder 0 00000 a 312 Security Alarm sss e o seri 316 SELVICE 6 29 4 saccade dt Aas eed tea ee eased ad 603 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 318 SmartBeams c comes m dae ewe ee ede Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS Tractiori Control as e b EE a a3 Turn Signal penssa ea guts SER Ren eS Vanity Mirror esae eR x RR ERR en VOlfage oues eate OES PER er e deem ob a Warning Instrument Cluster Description 640 INDEX M Loading Vehicle zie Pss x demi ne ees 500 Capacities seci kaip aii RR etn Kaos dep ds 502 TI eS 123 26 33a dk oo Eg dern ex me e dead 464 Kocks NCC a e E ar a TUNE 32 Automatic Door 0 0 0 0 aaaea 34 Auto Unlock 522 des Gowan ged aoa Ge eh DR 34 Child Protection sa 4 6 424 404 3594 4 Rae oes 35 DOOR ce nme cerpin rE ee ha ees 32 POWerDOOE rers odes oa eS cem BR ae 33 Lubrication Body sosea esa sengi eee 573 Ig INUtSa 2a gapa npea ia eek peg an das 520 Mainten
121. 0 Split Folding Rear Seat If Mi STORAGE ooooLentdt kl obe EE E 291 PII Ne Senin SER ora hee ete yy oe Glove Compartment cies 291 Cargo TiecDowns sls 298 Console Features i 22x4 9 nao Re ee 291 M ete pirrer eisena a Door Storage 0 0 00 eee eee 293 SEA WINDOW TE ARE adeadiga Camere ai Rear Window Defroster 299 Passenger Seat Storage If Equipped 294 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind shield The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting The mirror head can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while the small control under the mirror is set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 030407085 This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you This feature will be defaulted on and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse The a
122. 0004 602 Replacement Keys scie rx pam stias 20 Replacement Parts 1 2 0 0 0 0 0c eee eens 562 Replacement Tires sek gae ere i ekinera 479 Reporting Safety Defects s asaro storas nandou 625 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 317 Restraint Head 6 0 0 eee ees 227 Restraints Child anarem Vista eee ea bw Pale 84 Restraints Occupant llle eee 47 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck sisse 548 Rotation Tires llle 482 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle Liu 109 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 111 Safety Defects Reporting llle 625 Safety Exhaust Gas ss eet Rm tee 108 Safety Information Tire llle 458 Safety ipS e saisie neds ah ice oe ri dus ur 107 Schedule Maintenance sse 612 Seat Belt Maintenance llle 594 Seat Belt Reminder llle 59 Seat Bells eR he El RR 47 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 56 And Pregnant Women 0000005 60 Child Restraint 20 0 ee 84 Extender lt 3 caad cada sewed ink pews redd 61 Front Seat iiv 21S owe OR GRRE Ee ww ee 51 Inspection usa Se bee oot eae bina be 109 Operating Instructions 52 Pretensioners 00 0 eee 59 Rear Seat iore Pee eevee We Geb mae due ales 51 Untwisting Procedure 0000 56 Seals c p ea ded slated Go Cache ae hea RRE ee Adjustment eee He ted 05 6064 ka nac RR RUSO RATES Rear Folding 4 22 Re S
123. 296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE The rear seatback loops can be tucked away when not in use 030964927 Folded Rear Seatback When the seatback is folded to the upright position make i sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the Rear Seatback Loops seatback above the seat strap After releasing the seatback it can be folded forward ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297 WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper sta bility for child seats and or passengers An improp erly latched seat could cause serious injury The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts WARNING The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehic
124. 582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is ad equate With the engine off and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be be tween the MAX and MIN lines marked on the bottle As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac tory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter t
125. 90 Push Button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 Rear Head Restraints The rear outboard head restraints have three positions UP MID and DOWN The center head restraint has only two positions Up and Down When the center seat is being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised position When there are no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for the driver To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Push Button Folding Rear Seat The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area To fold the rear seatback pull on the loops located on the upper seatback 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE The upper seatback loops can be tucked away when not in use 030964927 Folded Rear Seatback When the seatback is folded to the upright position make i sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the Rear Seatback Loops seatback above the seat strap After releasing the seatback it can be folded forward ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 WARNING TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Two latches must be released to open the hood Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely
126. ARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF wane EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever 270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0 1 ft 0 30 cm Yellow 1 ft 3 ft 30cm 1 m Green 3 ft or greater 1 m or greater WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Park View Rear Back Up Camera Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob structions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death CAUTION To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only be used as a parking aid The Park View camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path e To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271 OVERHEAD CONSOLE NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry
127. At any time you can say the words Cancel or 3 Help 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear available commands press the Uconnect Voice Command vRbutton and say Help You will hear available commands for the screen displayed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 Uconnect Voice Commands The Uconnect Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are avail able at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect Voice Com mand Sve button Changing The Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command amp VR button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com mand system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Starting Voice Recognition VR Session In Radio Player
128. CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owners Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also is stamped into the right front body on the right front seat crossmember under the carpet and the vehicle registration and title 010864296 VIN Location INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS Cn N Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death Right Front Body VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 12 Mi VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED 21 Ignition Node Module IGNM If Equipped 12 Rearming Of The System 21 Keyless Ignition Node KIN If Equipped 13 To Arm The System 00000008 21 Standard Blade Ignition Key If Equipped 15 To Disarm The System 0 005 22 Key Fob If Equipped 16 Tamper Alert 2 0 2 2c e eee 23 Ignition Or Acces
129. D AUX etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387 CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean th
130. DING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273 The HomeLink buttons located on either the overhead console headliner or sunvisor designate the three differ ent HomeLink channels The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button 034033576 HomeLink Buttons Overhead Consoles 274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME 034000355 HomeLink Buttons Sunvisor Headliner NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active Before You Begin Programming HomeLink amp Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming For more efficient programming and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system Erase all channels before you begin programming To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes NOTE Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275 Programming
131. Dimming Mirror EQUIPPED ERE dle eae boi le be 124 It Equipped socsces deca bpsS OBRA UA 119 Rear Cross Path llle 130 Outside Mirrors llle 120 Modes Of Operation 000 131 Outside Mirrors Folding Feature Bl Uconnect Phone Uconnect 200 133 n RE uas Op ration xac Ra ine S a qae us 135 S ne Ada due dU ME oi AMNEM 142 E Pewee NEG oo bz 8 ko ohn ceca 122 Uconnect Phone Features 145 Heated Mirrors If Equipped 122 Advanced Phone Connectivity 150 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Commands mi eiea E i e aa 201 PHONE 5 rose eg ted a a Mere g ani es 152 Voice Training 205 General Information 163 E VOICECOMMAND 2 22 02 206 Bl Uconnect8 Phone 84 84N sss 163 eget BAO NE deen eris baud 206 Uconnect 8 4 8 4Nav 0 000 00008 163 U onneci Voice Commands rr ener rd 209 SIDRGIRHDIES crete he gabe tints quisi tds wb 0 NENNEN 219 Phone Call Features 0 0 178 Davee Gries It Rau ped OOE 220 Uconnect Phone Features 182 ManuabEront Sear Ease IOR Advanced Phone Connectivity 187 Adj s ment 3e ge ean tere ts ran aes 222 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Manual Front Seat
132. E The vehicle will only unlock the doors when the doors are locked using the door panel switch a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the vehicle and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected outside the vehicle The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions are true The doors are locked using the RKE transmitter The doors are locked using the LOCK button on the Passive Entry door handles The doors are manually locked using the door lock knobs There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside the vehicle and within 5 ft 1 5 m of either Passive Entry door handle Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch and then close the doors E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 To Enter The Trunk NOTE If you inadvertently leave your vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the trunk lid the trunk lid will automatically unlatch unless another one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmit ters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft 1 0 m of the deck lid To Lock The Vehicle s Doors With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the deck lid press the button on the right side of CHMSL Center High Mounted Stop Light which is located on the deck lid With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver or passenger front door ha
133. EFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es With the ignition in the ON RUN position the Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed With the ignition in the OFF position the Trunk Open symbol will display until the trunk is closed Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for more information on trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke Trunk Emergency Release As a security measure a trunk internal emergency release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS glow in the dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems mm Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers
134. ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 446 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 447 Brake Assist System BAS 449 Traction Control System TCS 450 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 450 Trailer Sway Control TSC 451 Hill Start Assist HSA 00 452 Electronic Stability Control ESC 455 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 458 Tire Markings s er Eae d 458 Tire Identification Number TIN 462 Tire Terminology And Definitions 463 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 464 E STARTING AND OPERATING 405 E TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION 469 Bi TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS 482 Tire Pressufe 22 emiesm e ere d 469 Bi TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING Tire Inflation Pressures 470 PESCENDUDGNI vue gestae yep estas id Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 472 ed eee ee qnd abe Radial Ply Tires 0 esee 472 Pe Seana es iod NU NEQNE TREE 473 General Information 492 Run Flat Tires If Equipped 474 M FUEL REQUIREMENTS 492 am Spare Tires If Equipped esses 475 14L Turbo Engine 492 Tiro Spinhii oov coser EU REA TCENI 477 2 0L And 2 4L Engine 0 0 0 0 cee ue 492 Tread Wear Indicators 00 478 ee ds Lif
135. EUTRAL or PARK B 4 Any door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Set tings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or a small coin into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door 021836149 Child Protection Door Lock Function WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged locked 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses NOTE For emergency exit from the rear seats when the Child Protection Door Lock System is engaged manually rotate the door lock button to the unlocked position roll down the window and open the door using the outside door handle KEYLESS ENTER N GO Th
136. Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid if equipped or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E MIRRORS eesse caru nu oia m 119 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 123 mm Inside Day Night Mirror 119 Hi BLIND SPOT MONITORING BSM IF Automatic
137. Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver and Front Passenger Knee Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the START or ON RUN position If the ignition is in the OFF position or in the ACC position the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momenta
138. G Continued Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your Never place or install floor mats or other floor vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they secured to prevent them from moving and interfer cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals ing with the pedals or the ability to control the or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways vehicle WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners Continued Continued es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111 WARNING Continued e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly in stalled if not equipped from the factory
139. IC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition the EVIC will display the WIPE OFF REAR PARK ASSIST SENSORS SERVICE PARK ASSIST SENSORS or the SERVICE PARK AS SIST SYSTEM message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265 If WIPE OFF REAR PARK ASSIST SENSORS appears If SERVICE PARK ASSIST SENSORS or SERVICE in the EVIC make sure the outer surface and the under PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the EVIC see an side of the rear fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow authorized dealer ice mud dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer AM 760 WJR x MPH AM 760 WJR Ec Pa R Service Park Assist Sensors QOO R b d 032766812 Wipe Off Rear Park Assist Sensors Service Park Assist Sensors dq Wipe Off Rear Park Assist Sensors 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE AM 760 WJR MF FH R Pa Service Park Assist System 9o00 032766809 Service Park Assist System The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system will be auto matically disabled when there are faulted conditions outside of the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system that inhibit the feature from functi
140. ING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door B Pillar Location For Tire And Loading Information Placard 055001823 STARTING AND OPERATING 465 Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle Total weight your vehicle can carry SEATING CAPACITY S TOTAL 91 HOMR S HEAR S Tire size designed for your vehicle THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF RENE E Mie SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG om Cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and TIRE FRONT SPARE spare tires ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE f P395 70R 4 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 COLD TIR aia gag i ji SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire And Loading Information Placard 466 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the
141. If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser lo cated in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Recirculation When outside air contains smoke odors or C amp S high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399 selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The recirculation feature may be unavailable soft key button greyed out The Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected At tempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Automatic Temperature Control ATC Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO hard key or soft key button 4 on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system
142. Lid Release 46 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 548 Hazard Warning Flasher 0 519 Jacking siiman tmr Ru ee hee ce Eo 532 Jump Starting 340 wasters sawn Re ds 544 Overhealing sues cre VR era RR eda 519 TOWING du ease ees Fd Gea P de Ead 552 Emergency Trunk Release 4 46 Emission Control System Maintenance 561 Engine s des oet dba edu onse eda 558 Alt Cleaner c20 c eder RR pera dines 567 Block Heater 229m cee sed Tins pags 4 412 Break In Recommendations 106 Checking Oil Level 2 2 0 0 ee siegt 564 Compartment t e tarten gap ann E E E aE OR E 557 COO e io 5 At eit ond at eiea aee f 577 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 00000005 108 Fuel Requirements s zi 29 eee kem kd 492 Jump Starting ssa ald rk em RR Rs 544 Oil i sayeth esa ae Pane Baw SR ER Re es 564 Automatic Transmission ll 588 Oil Fill r Cap sedere muore hol era e anexos 558 Engine Oll ote dere Roe bri oda 567 Oil Selection resi ss e X Rb ERE RES 565 Engine Oil Disposal 200 566 Overheating och o S t kest E makena e este ants 519 Flashers Temperature Gauge viue pep e es 310 Hazard Warning i5 ses c m Xe er gi 519 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 80 Turn Signal ses tee der AN aR hd bo 111 Entry System Illuminated coe e esetere sesse 23 Hlash Io P ss 24 ese RE oui 3
143. Lift the switch for less than a half a second and release The window will go up automatically Manual Up Lift the switch for more than a half a second and release when you want the window to stop NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Reset Auto Up Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window may need to be reset To reset Auto Up 1 Make sure the door is fully closed 2 Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 3 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors To disab
144. Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occu pants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat if equipped in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your autho rized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger if equipped with BeltAlert seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING Y
145. Modes In this mode you can say the following commands NOTE The commands can be said on any screen when a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect Voice Command Sve button Source To switch to the audio source say Change source to Disc for example This command can be given in any mode or screen e Track to change the track 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Voice Tree Uconnect Voice Command AM FM Satellite Radio availble commands These commands can be spoken when the AM FM or Satellite radio is playing after pushing the Uconnect voice command button 4 VR on the steering wheel Commands only available Commands available in Commands only available in AM FM mode AM FM Satellite mode in Satellite mode X Audio will Audio will change to the change to 950 AM or FM AM frequency or Satellite Channel stored in preset 5 0475016871 Audio will Audio will Audio will change to the change to change to next Satellite satellite station Satellite Rock Station 80 s on 8 Channel 8 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 NOTE 3 You can replace 8 with any other satellite channel 1 You can replace 950 AM with any other AM or EM M mber received by the radio frequency such as 98 7 FM 4 You can replace rock with any of the satellite music 2 You can replace 80 s on 8 with any other satellite ypes station name rece
146. NOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the Dome ON position extreme top position The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position extreme bottom position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk or activate the Panic Alarm from dis tances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit ter buttons for all RKE transmitters 021307469 Key Fob With RKE Transmitter IGNM 0202005282 Key Fob With RKE Transmitter KIN To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks This feature lets you program the system
147. NT PANEL Se NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you e Range To Empty start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Two Button EVIC If Equipped This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the e Tire Pressure steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following Fuel Economy Info e Cruise Control Info e Stored Messages e Settings Odometer e Units e Digital Vehicle Speed Lan Languag e Trip Info UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 The system allows the driver to select information by e UP Arrow Button pressing teollowing bottone Mounted on thie steering A Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll wheel upward through the main menus Odometer Digital Vehicle Speed Trip Info Range To Empty Average Fuel Economy Current Fuel Economy Stored Messages Settings e RIGHT Arrow Button Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to gt access the sub menu screens of a main menu item Press and hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds to reset displayed selected features that can be reset 041064739 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons Two Button EVIC Messages Controls Key Fob Battery Low e Wrong Key Fob 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss e e e e e e e e Key Fob Damaged Ke
148. ONTENTS PAGE 1 2 10 INTRODUCTION ctestetetecsedeatesesen tp etastinta drea SUIS Eta Rida Edd 3 HEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE l eee 9 I UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE see 113 mm UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ien 301 A STARTING AND OPERATING aua Deuda thor debe were Dacia v pa eed a od 403 mm WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4 ctp so e er Ec RE EE Y TEE ER RUE BRE Rd S 517 m MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE quu 29 53d 33 E eben ERR Y TR MY E UR eU br R e 555 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 12 1 pua erac Ed be eROE TREE ERE TUR TKU EU Reed d 611 8o IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE con sicckovntsseunesesinennssesenawesass 619 9 INDEX peda 629 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS B INTRODUCTION 000 4 Hi VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 6 ll HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 4 BM VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS 7 E WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 6 4 INTRODUCTION Sas INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle
149. OUR VEHICLE 61 Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Resiraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee In addition the vehicle is equipped with a Supplementa
150. Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature NOTE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds programmable when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area To activate the delay feature place the ignition in the OFF position while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off If you turn the headlights or parking lights on or place the ignition in ACC or RUN the system will cancel the delay 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this feature e The headlight delay time is programmable using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Au
151. PMS pressures and always reinstall the valve stem eap This will warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system op eration or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size NOTE prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Using aftermarket tire sealants may The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care 5 cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure sensor to become inoperable After using an after or condition market tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes Continued the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure 486 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev stopping ability els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver The TPMS is not a substitu
152. ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense Sys tem Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph 16 km h ParkSense amp Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 59 in 150 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for furt
153. Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User s Manual 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Voice Command For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice command period Performance is maximized under Low To Medium Blower Setting e Low To Medium Vehicle Speed e Low Road Noise e Smooth Road Surface Fully Closed Windows Dry Weather Condition Even though the system is designed for many languages and accents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mai
154. Press the A B C button to select the A B or C mode Each button can be set for up to 3 stations in AM FM and Sat This allows a total of 15 AM 15 FM and 15 SAT stations to be stored into pushbutton memory Player Button Pressing the Player button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Player mode CD USB iPODG AUX Bluetooth Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371 CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON RUN and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 The use of other size
155. RADIO WITH Operating Instructions Radio Mode CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND SiriusXM RADIO NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME C control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME 5b control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be Uconnect 200 set at the same volume level as last played 366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons KK gt gt to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will by pass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours are highlighted 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side ENTER BROWSE control knob to set the minutes
156. RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph 5 km h to objects moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph 32 km h such as in parking lot situations ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 NOTE In a parking lot situation oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles the system will not be able to alert the driver When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms including reducing the radio volume WARNING RCP is not a Back Up Aid system It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using RCP Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before back ing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Modes Of Operation Modes Of Operation With EVIC Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel
157. REFIT kit mm 2 Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle 1 and place the sticker on the instru ment panel 3 Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle 530 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE storage location Quickly proceed to D Drive Ve hicle CAUTION The metal end fitting from Power Plug 8 may get hot after use so it should be handled carefully Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 can result in sealant con tacting your skin clothing and the vehicle s inte rior It can also result in sealant contacting internal TIREFIT kit components which may cause perma nent damage to the kit D Drive Vehicle Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire drive the vehicle 5 miles 8 km or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire Do not exceed 55 mph 90 km h WARNING TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using TIREFIT Do not exceed 55 mph 90 km h until the tire is repaired or replaced Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you E After Driving Pull over to a safe location Refer to Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT bef
158. RR Res 240 Eth nol serere EE E EE 493 Flooded Engine Starting 00 411 Event Data Recorder ceerde esaia sate meri ceca 83 Floor Console se saaha eee ed e y enn 291 Exhaust Gas Caution naoa aaua aaee 108 Fluid Brak risie seine eee 610 Exhaust System 6 6 nie mranteni 108 Fluid Capacities 6 0 ee eee 607 Exterior Folding Mirrors 045 D IhudLbeakss su RR be peed oie 111 Exterior Lighting oessa s aa eee eR RR 234 Fluid Level Checks Exterior Lights i23 duces daw des aoe i 111 Automatic Transmission s s Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Filler Location Fuel 2 0 0 000000 916 FOS Lights 22e oe ess Ae ems Filters Folding Rear Seats o erore dake 0h ntm RR hs Ait Cleaner sucesos docs e Eee SS 567 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ss emete aa Air Conditioning l pM Smee See ae ae E 492 Lon M HT 497 Additives s 26 2275 und did qoo Remp dur teorico 495 Capacity snc cn ae a mS Ea ma baia cat dodge i 607 Clean AE aas codec erede Gt Eee dad 493 Ethanol sarsari Ter Aa dwn GA ace Pd 493 Filler Cap Gas Cap ess esse ene 497 Filler Door Gas Cap 000000 316 Gasoline duces RP Si BOE Ow we aod 492 Gauge aou agri Node egg M epa ex ches 314 Light csi cranes ER one bie idie E s 316 Materials Added 0 0 00 cece eens 495 Methanol is i aed Ra RR a ek 493 Octane Rating 492 Requirements llle 492 Tank Capacity eee 607 lai
159. STARTING YOUR VEHICLE the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor If it is locked the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description un der Occupant Restraints The cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a child restraint s belt path Please see the following table s and the following sections for more information about both types of seat belts Lap Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child Restraints in this Vehicle 022669039 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101 What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child restraint for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Can the head restraints be removed Yes Yes Contact
160. T Foreign objects e g screws or o nails should not be removed from the tire TIREFIT can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately nel 4 F 20 C 3 E 7 This kit will provide a temporary tire seal allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles 160 km with a maximum speed of 55 mph 90 km h TIREFIT Storage The TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk TIREFIT Components 1 Sealant Bottle 5 Mode Select Knob 2 Deflation Button 6 Sealant Hose Clear 3 Pressure Gauge 7 Air Pump Hose Black 4 Power Button 8 Power Plug located on bottom side of TIREFIT Kit 524 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Using The Power Button Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols Push and release the Power Button 4 once to to indicate the air or sealant mode turn On the TIREFIT kit Push and release the Selecting Air Mode Power Button 4 again to turn Off the TIREFIT kit g Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to A this position for air pump operation only Use Using The Deflation Button K the Black Air Pump Hose 7 when selecting Press the Deflation Button 2 to reduce the air this mode pressure in the tire if it becomes over inflated Selecting Sealant Mode Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and TIREFIT Usage Precautions turn to this position to inject the TIRE Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant
161. ULB REPLACEMENT ues dee m x 603 Brake Systems a oe ssw hoy sep rS 583 Headlamps llle 603 Automatic Transmission If Equipped 586 Backup Lamps 4 5 Lies 44 Son 64 04 604 Manual Transmission If Equipped 588 License Lamp 32e xe eae DURER RR E 606 Appearance Care And Protection B FLUID CAPACITIES 12 22 33 dra 607 From Corrosion 0 6 6 eee 588 E FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND la FUSES 2er posed e OR O9 0 ORC RRS 595 GENUINE PARIS cas i ace Ste toc 608 Interior Fuses 6 6 eee 595 Engine aeg sees wie aed aad 608 Underhood Fuses Lied tenue 597 Chassis ua ied igo prb S de Ga sone add 610 Body Control Module BCM Fuses 600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1 4L TURBO 8 0703017091 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Power Distribution Center Fuses 2 Engine Oil Level Indicator 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Fill 7 Battery 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 Air Cleaner Filter 558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 0L 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 Engine Oil Fill 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 4 Power Distribution Center Fuses ind 5 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Battery 7 Engine Oil Level Indicator 8 Air Cleaner Filter MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 4L 0703017090 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Washer Fluid Reservoir
162. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Uconnect Phone will display an in progress screen while the system is connecting 68 yf FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Bluetooth Pairing Bluetooth Connection in progress Please wait dial Nav es l5 a WJ e Player Controls Climate Phone More Mobile Phone Pairing Progress 5 When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range Pair Additional Mobile Phones 1 Touch the Settings soft key from the Phone main screen 2 Touch the Add Device soft key 3 Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen 4 Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting 5 When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 this phone the highest priority This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range NOTE For phones which are not made a favorite the phone priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The
163. UR VEHICLE M 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Where are you I need more direction LOL Why I love you Call me Call me later Thanks See You in 15 minutes I am on my way I ll be late Are you there yet Where are we meeting 16 Can this wait 17 Bye for now 18 When can we meet 19 Send number to call 20 Start without me Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON OFF Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop the system from announcing the new incoming mes sages e Press the button After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup SMS Incoming Message Announcement you will then be given a choice to change it ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including inte
164. URES OF YOUR VEHICLE a Radio AM e Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In e Main Menu to switch to the main menu thi he followi is mode you may say the following commands Satellite Radio Frequency to change the frequency To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite e Next Station to select the next station Radio In this mode you may say the following com nos ET mands e Previous Station to select the previous station ads e Channel Number to change the channel by its e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu spoken number e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands e Next Channel to select the next channel e Previous Channel to select the previous channel e List Channel to hear a list of available channels e Frequency to change the frequency oe ee eye EN e Next Station to select the next station e Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu e Previous Station to select the previous station e Main Menu to switch to the main menu ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 Disc Mode Bluetooth Streaming BT Mode To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you To switch to Bl
165. Universal amp Connect Commands These commands can be spoken from any screen after pushing the Uconnect Phone button on the steering wheel Voice command Cancels Bluetooth Phone List of paired List of paired listening to ger to Settings screen Bluetooth audio Bluetooth your voice Soles ade maid will be shown devices will be phones will be command aieo an Connection shown shown process will be completed with touch screen 0475016866 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration VOICE COMMAND Uconnect 200 Voice Command System Operation gt This Voice Command system allows you to 4 VR control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface Sys tem as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user vo
166. VEHICLE M Backup Lamps 3 Twist the bulb socket one quarter turn counter clock i move 1 Open trunk wise to remove 2 Remove trim cover 073365516 Bulb Socket Trim Cover MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605 4 Replace bulb 5 Twist the bulb socket one quarter turn clockwise to install 6 Install trim cover Backup Bulb 606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE License Lamp 1 Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear fascia 2 Remove the bulb and socket assembly 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 073300294 1 License Lamp Bulb 2 Socket 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly 5 Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia and then install the screws ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607 FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate Fuel 1 4L Engines 13 2 Gallons 50 Liters Fuel 2 0L 2 4L Engines 14 2 Gallons 54 Liters Fuel 2 4L GT models only 15 8 Gallons 60 Liters Engine Oil With Filter 1 4L Turbo Engine SAE 5W 40 Synthetic API Certified 4 Quarts 3 8 Liters 2 0L Engine SAE 0W 20 API Certified 5 Quarts 4 7 Liters 2 4L Engine SAE 0W 20 API Certified 5 5 Quarts 5 2 Liters Cooling System 1 4L Turbo Engine MOPAR OAT Antifreeze Engine Cool 7 2 Quarts 6 8 Liters ant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 2 0L and 2 4L Engine MOPAR OAT Antifreeze Engine 7 2 Quart
167. VR engine Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Voice Command VR button on your steering wheel 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the w button on your steering wheel and say a com mand or say help All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the w button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu You can also press the
168. a recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and every Canadian province requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child Car
169. ack title album etc information on the radio display The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod 9 contents The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB AUX connector if supported by the specific audio device Controlling The iPod amp Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons To get into the iPod USB MP3 control mode and access a connected audio device either press the AUX button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say USB or Switch to USB Once in the iPod USB ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381 MP3 control mode audio tracks if available from audio device start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to iPod USB MP3 control mode the iPod or external USB device automatically starts Play mode In Play mode the following buttons on the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod or external USB device and display data e Use the TUNE SCROLL control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track or press the VR button and say Next Track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click will jump to the previous track in the list or press the VR button and say Previous Track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the RW button Holding the RW
170. ackwards at 6 mph 10 km h or faster or if in AutoStick mode a DOWNSHIFT is requested while in 1st gear 3rd gear or higher is requested at a stop or a requested shift would cause engine lugging or overspeed Make sure the vehicle is stopped before engaging DRIVE or REVERSE SHIFT TO NEUTRAL THEN D or R The transmission has shifted itself into NEUTRAL due to a fault condition or overheat due to excessive idling when stopped in DRIVE with the brakes re leased but the shift lever remains in gear Shift into NEUTRAL and then back into gear for continued driving If the transmission will not re engage see your autho rized dealer AUTOSTICK NOT AVAILABLE AutoStick mode is unavailable due to a shift lever fault See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and service 428 STARTING AND OPERATING Ses MESSAGE DESCRIPTION AUTOMATIC MODE The transmission is unable to shift itself automatically due to a fault condition NOT AVAILABLE Use the AutoStick mode to shift the transmission manually See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and service REDUCE GEAR The transmission pump is overheating In AutoStick mode try to drive in one CHANGES specific gear as much as possible avoiding frequent gear changes In DRIVE the transmission will automatically modify its shift schedule to reduce the number of shifts TRANS GETTING HOT The transmission driving clutch is overheating usually due
171. addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi tive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity Setting 4 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity The rain sense wipers will automatically change between an intermittent wipe slow wipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of moisture that is sensed on the windshield Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation NOTE The Rain Sens
172. aedes 511 Trailer Towing Guide llle 506 Trailer Weight cia Tasari llle 506 Transmission Ad tomate serorei renen AREE er yb E 416 PUG eli oe bed nsepSRE PEPIS 588 Maintenance s amp dant ee De Race RUE RR we 586 Manual br era em ud 412 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 27 ee INDEX 647 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 273 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 24 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transporting Pets Tread Wear Indicators llle 478 Trip Odonpietet i dipet Rates rr e m deoa 316 Trunk Lid Deck Lid 2 250000400 e604 45 Trunk Release Emergency llle 46 Trunk Release Remote Control lius 45 Turn Signals as e ea Tee ee e n FS 239 UCI Connector zz c seva ec eras 378 Uconnect Advanced Phone Connectivity 150 Phone Call Features 0 000020 ee 178 Phone Features 00000 145 Uconnect 130 With Satellite Radio Playing MP3 Files 373 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 133 Uniform Tire Quality Grades less 627 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 378 Universal Transmitter lesen 273 Unleaded Gasoline gk ERR 492 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 56 Vanity Mirrors s sos ee s Re s 123 Vehicle Certification Label sies 500 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading
173. al Information High Speed Inflation Pressures 2 00 0000s Jacking ose e RR eed a Life of Tires Load Capacity Pressure Monitor System TPMS 646 INDEX ae Pressure Warning Light s sa iess aiet etetni aias 308 Quality Grading dt bee ia nE 627 Radial 2i 24 5 0 45 oit eraai a eremi kad 472 Replacements serai hansis patanong eles we eS 479 Rotation usnm ex be ee REL Ga 482 oii A ERE 458 SIZES uisi ons d PES big egre p xd 460 Snow Les kd onde RR ED ea Es 473 Spare Tees scere ud raa tree os Ea a 533 Spinning 22l 3 s surp geek Ra ae 477 Tread Wear Indicators llli 478 Tire Safety Information llle 458 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 507 To Open Hood sos ee pa eg ea a 231 TOWING cete eines ree HE edem ew s 502 24 Hour Towing Assistance less 147 Disabled Vehicle 0 0000 ce eee 552 Guide aeee sa tanh Seance dee REC e hc nas es 506 Recreational sar saccade a aid Sarna darts dnd 515 AA il od aa ae Sea 506 Towing Assistance iss ha RR porasi Ree bn 147 Trac Onas seges ood tee er iR PU DLP aad 440 Traction Control s 0235655 RR RR 450 Trailer Sway Control TSC 451 Trailer IOWIDg i54 does ea a he RR dre bias ee 502 Cooling System Dips s esses e hh 514 Hiteh S cca ates ere eR P STPRSEe Ra 505 Minimum Requirements 55 508 Trailer and Tongue Weight 507 WINE isses exo atii dex emet EE
174. all tires a vehicle graphic is displayed with tire pressure values in each corner or the graphic If one or more tires have low pressure Inflate Tire To XX and a vehicle graphic are displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the graphic Tire pressure values that are too low will be flashing e If the Tire Pressure System requires service Service TPM System is displayed Tire Pressure is an informa tion only function and cannot be reset Stored Messages EA When a stored warning message is present this icon is displayed in the lower left side of the Tire Pressure menu This feature shows the E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 number of stored warning messages Pressing the RIGHT e Fuel Economy Info arrow button will allow you to see what the stored e Screen Setup messages are Settings EVIC Units And Language Selection TADAN Vemcle speed Displays the units used for the Outside Temperature Analog Vehicle Speed Average and Current Fuel Economy Distance to Empty e Trip A and Tire Pressure features Press and Release the RIGHT arrow button to toggle units between U S and MET TUER RIC e Vehicle Info Press the UP arrow button until the Language is dis Tire Pressure played then press the Right arrow button to select Coolant Temperature English Francais or Espanol depending on availability Oil Temperature Four Button EVIC If Equipped Oil Life This system allows
175. ally This is called Express In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown Open During Express Open operation any movement from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen gers are also properly secured Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result m Opening Sunroof Express Continued 284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again
176. ally deactivate the system normal operation of low beams 2 Push back on the multifunction lever once again to reactivate the system Daytime Running Lights DRL The Daytime Running Lights will come on whenever the ignition is placed in the RUN position the headlights are off and the parking brake is off The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving NOTE The Daytime Running Lights can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Fog Lights If Equipped The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch O 200 YW 031464416 Fog Light Switch To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the D headlight switch To turn off the front fog lights either press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on NOTE The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on However selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Mu
177. alytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577 To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam Cooling System age Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition WARNING when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis motion connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
178. ance Follow these recommendations to guard on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load against damage index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Traction device must be of proper size for the tire as recommended by the traction device manufacturer Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 481 e Install on Front Tires CAUTION Continued e Due to limited clearance a 225 45R17 tire with a Security Chain Company SCC Super Z6 low profile traction device or equivalent is recommended WARNING Using tires of different size and type M S Snow between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling You could lose control and have a collision Because of restricted traction device clearance be tween tires and other suspension components it is important that only traction devices in good condi tion are used Broken devices can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use e Install device as tightly as possible and then re tighten after driving about mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not drive f
179. ance Free Battery llle 568 Maintenance Procedures 00000 eee 563 Maintenance Schedule 0000 eee 612 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 318 Manual Service 0 0 ee eee 626 Manual Transmission leen 412 Fluid Level Check 00 00 00 cee 588 Frequency of Fluid Change 588 Lubricant Selection llle 588 Shift Speeds eda o LDE LP RR IAS 413 Master Cylinder Brakes llle 584 Methanol a resede neue Pe ec CPP SE ed 493 Mini Trip Computer 1 aas kg sor dore Ron o a 328 MIEIOIS 2uuaceegeed a0 oR oS oH pad Sea oes 119 Automatic Dimming 0 000 000 119 Electric Powered llle 122 Electric Remote 0 0 0 cee eee 122 Exterior Folding 0 0 0 0 0 2 e eee 121 Heated jos sas eh ah ea eA Ra Oa wR EY 122 Ou tside a Geass ios Nae ae A ne a SR a 120 BRearview iie esed Go sraute SS Ep Rex 119 Vany nis sor DEOR Rau he rh e wa ene ses 123 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System 483 Mopar Parts cio eee e ka e eas 562 MTBEZELDBE ssas imatt Hig alk 3v deed ES Pd 493 en INDEX 641 Multi Function Control Lever 238 New Vehicle Break In Period 0 106 Occupant Restraints 6 6 6 eee ee 47 Occupant Restraints Sedan 0 4 65 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 492 Odometer cos
180. and front passenger seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage then move it up or down to the position that fits you best FS Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For ad
181. and played Selecting A Different Audio Device 1 Press the PHONE button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and following the beep say Setup then say Select Audio Devices 3 Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect phone system to list the audio devices Next Track Use the SEEK UP button or press the VR button on the radio and say Next Track to jump to the next music track on your cellular phone es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385 Previous Track Use the SEEK DOWN button or press the VR button on the radio and say Previous Track to jump to the previous music track on your cellular phone Browse Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA device Only the current song that is playing will display info STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches Siem 045035190 Remote Sound Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume 386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD HD
182. any contact with clothing Continued en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 527 WARNING Continued TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex In case of an allergic reaction or rash consult a physician immediately Keep TIREFIT out of reach of chil dren If swallowed rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water Do not induce vomiting Consult a physician immediately Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT A Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT 1 Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle s Hazard Warning flashers 2 Verify that the valve stem on the wheel with the deflated tire is in a position that is near to the ground This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses 6 and 7 to reach the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceed ing Place the transmission in PARK auto transmission or in Gear manual transmission and turn Off the igni tion 4 Set the parking brake B Setting Up To Use TIREFIT 1 Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to the Sealant Mode position Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire 528 WHAT TO DO
183. apability of displaying an interactive iPod 126 flower through the Fuel Economy sub menu which will em add one flower pedal for every 2 5 Miles Per Gallon a MPG 1 06 km per liter km 1 increment Once the vehicle reached 30 MPG the EVIC will display a full 35 mpg flower 31 mpg 438 m ooe 12567 miles Fuel Economy MPG Flower Digital Display Average Fuel Economy This feature shows the average fuel economy since the 12567 miles last reset When Average Fuel Economy is selected The ai word RESET gt with right arrow appears next to it Pressing the RIGHT arrow button will reset Average Fuel Economy which displays 0 immediately after reset Fuel Economy MPG Flower Analog Display ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345 Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average read ing before the reset Range To Empty RTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level RTE cannot be reset through the RIGHT arrow button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the RTE displayed value When the RTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the RTE
184. arrow button until the feature displays zero Range To Empty RTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level RTE cannot be reset NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the RTE display value 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss When the RTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the RTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new RTE value will display Average Fuel Economy This feature shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When Average Fuel Economy is selected The word RESET gt with right arrow appears next to it Pressing the RIGHT arrow button will reset Average Fuel Economy which displays 0 immediately after reset Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average read ing before the reset Tire PSI Press and release the UP button until Tire Pressure is displayed Tire pressure information is displayed as follows e If tire pressure is OK for
185. at are flashing or in a different color on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended 490 STARTING AND OPERATING Se cold placard pressure value The system will automati cally update the Inflate Tire to XX message will no longer be displayed the graphic display of the pressure value s will stop flashing or return to their normal color and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure s have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information Service TPMS Message The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds This text message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor s is not being received If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will not be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or
186. at it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Operating conditions such as frequent short trips trailer tow extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures and E85 fuel usage will influence when the Change Oil message is displayed Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3 500 miles 5 600 km since last reset Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever comes first Severe Duty All Models Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles 6 500 km if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty e Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip Check engine oil level Check windshield washer fluid level Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake master cylinder as needed Check function of all interior and exterior lights es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 613 Required Maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for required maintenance At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
187. ate the vehicle After placing the ignition in the ON RUN position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal AS vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electron ics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Replacement Keys NOTE Only Keys or Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key or Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended A
188. aterials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To
189. ation WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 539 WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the wheel bolts and tire 7 Mount the spare tire 0605015785 Rear Jacking Location 5 Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire 540 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME CAUTION NOTE For vehicles so equipped do not attempt to install a Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly Refer to Compact Spare Tire and to Limited Use Spare under lires General Information in Starting and Operating for additional warnings cautions and information about the spare tire its use and operation 8 Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel Lightly tighten the wheel bolts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle 060567506 has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury Mounting Spare Tire ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 541 9 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack assembly using the means provided Release the
190. ation relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle 480 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING WARNING Continued Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having that specified for your vehicle Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus failure ani loss Ore ele control pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use e km Be with load ratings TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Use of traction devices require sufficient tire to body capacity other than what was originally equipped clear
191. avity Maxi Mini Fuse Description Cavity Maxi Mini Fuse Description Fuse Fuse F30 20 Amp Power Outlet F85 10 Amp Sunroof LRSM Yellow Console Red Power Outlet F81 60 Amp Interior PDC Bat Console UCI Blue tery Feed Power AUX Port Cigar Seats Lighter F82 30Amp Amplifier F86 20 Amp Green Yellow F83 40 Amp HVAC Blower F87 10 Amp Wastegate Purge Orange Motor Red Solenoid OBD F84 20 Amp Cigar Lighter Vent VANE DRY Mell we gen Sensor Heat ers F88 10 Amp Heated Outside Red Mirrors 600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Body Control Module BCM Fuses Cavity Car Mini Description ru Tem tridge Fuse Cavity Car Mini Description Fuse trid F n d F37 10 Amp Instrument Panel Fo BER Red Cluster pare F38 20 A Door Lock F13 15 Amp Left Headlamp UL eee Blue F31 S F42 Spare ar c F3 20 Amp Windshield Washer F32 10 Amp Interior Lighting Yellow Pum Red Decklid Liftgate E s Release F47 x 5 Amp Transmission Con Tan trol Module Tcm F33 25 Amp Window Motor 20 A 5 Clear Driver F48 x X i mp opare ellow F34 25 Amp Window Motor Clear Passenger F49 M Stop Lamp Switch m F36 15 Amp Intrusion Module A Blue ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavit
192. ay exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel 286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS IF EQUIPPED The 12 Volt 13 Amp instrument panel power outlet is located on the lower instrument panel below the climate controls The power outlet has power available when the ignition switch is in the ACC or RUN position The power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit if equipped with an optional Smoker s Package KSS Instrument Panel Outlet NOTE To ensure proper operation a MOPAR cigar knob and element must be used ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287 CAUTION Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper us
193. battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE with automatic transmission or 2nd Gear and REVERSE with manual transmission while gently en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 549 pressing the accelerator Use the least amount of accel erator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the en gine NOTE 1 4L Turbo automatic transmission vehicles can not be rocked in this manner because the transmission will not allow shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE while the wheels are turning CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle NOTE Press the ESC off switch to place the Electronic Stability Control ESC system in partial off mode before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating for further infor mation Once the v
194. be adjusted so that the top impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants head and the AHR USELESS The AHRs will automatically return to their normal The head restraints for all occupants must be prop Position following a rear impact If the AHRs do not erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu return to their normal position see your authorized pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad dealer immediately justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head NOTE The head restraints should only be removed by restraint To lower the head restraint press the push qualified technicians for service purposes only If either button located at the base of the head restraint and push of the head restraints require removal see your autho downward on the head restraint rized dealer WARNING Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death em 0309074
195. be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the Key Fob When the ignition is in the OFF position the transmission is locked in PARK securing the ve hicle against unwanted movement Continued 418 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued e Children should be warned not to touch the park ing brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the full OFF key removal position The key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the full OFF position and the transmission is locked in PARK when ever the ignition switch is in the full OFF position NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will tra
196. before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for mainte nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563 DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed Maintenance Schedule there are other components which
197. between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact All head restraints may be removed Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint Yes In positions with cinching latch plates CINCH the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor 102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the car seat Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat 5 To lock the seat belt pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of t
198. bolt torque is very important to ensure back into the normal range If the pointer remains on that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle Any the H turn the engine off immediately and call for time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the service vehicle the lug nuts bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench Torque Specifications Lug Nut Bolt Torque Lug Nut Lug Nut Bolt Size Bolt Socket Size 100 Ft Lbs 135 N m M12 x 125 19 mm Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles Wheel Mounting Surface WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 521 522 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE Tighten the lug nuts bolts in a star pattern until each After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut bolt torque to be nut bolt has been tightened twice sure that all the lug nuts bolts are properly seated against the wheel WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 0605006372 Torque Patterns WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 523 TIREFIT KIT IF EQUIPPED TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation Small punctures up to 14 6 mm in the tire tread can be sealed with TIREFI
199. book cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Managing Your Favorite Phonebook There are three ways you can add an entry to your Favorite Phonebook 1 During an active call of a number to make a favorite touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the phone main screen After loading the mobile phonebook select Phone book from the Phone main screen then select the appropriate number Touch the next to the selected number to display the options pop up In the pop up select Add to Favorites ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 68 uf FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 ou touch the on that selected entry When the Options Phonebook gt Mobile gt Contact Df Sions pop up appears touch Add from Mobile You will then be asked which contact and number to choose 4b Ana Conda Add to Favorites ARAS AEN from your mobile phonebook When complete the new favorite will be shown Lii F 248 456 7891 lm 248 577 6215 68 4J FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 gt Phonebook gt F cal fj Voicemail Mobile Add from Mobile ES e A amp s PY M o E J Favorites Empty Radio Playor Controls Shir gt Nav Phone More LL _ SSS Mom s Cell Phonebook Favorites rode d ving Assistance NOTE If the Favorites list is full you will be asked to
200. c Vehicle Information Center EVIC Reconfigurable Telltales This area will show reconfigurable amber telltales Low Fuel Telltale Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC 31 Red Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Reconfigurable Telltales This area will show reconfigurable red telltales Door s Ajar Oil Pressure Warning Telltale Charging System Telltale Electronic Throttle Control ETC Telltale Engine Temperature Warning Telltale Electric Power Steering Malfunction For further information refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 Ems O QA 041064390 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 1 EVIC Steering Wheel Controls 2 EVIC Display The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu The main display area also displays pop up 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn ing or information messages These pop up messages fall into several categories e Five Second Stored Messages When the ap
201. can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using e Press the w button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and is usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the w button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the
202. can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering NOTE Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door At least once a month Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket type pressure gauge Do not make a visual ee STARTING AND OPERATING 471 judgement when determining proper inflation Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures
203. ce and damage the emissions control system Continued 496 STARTING AND OPERATING EE CAUTION Continued e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser vice Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Continued ee
204. cks te hee area ER 35 Clean Air Gasoline llle 493 Cleaning Wh eelS 24 40 380848 Od oT AUD SED eR es 591 Climate Control llle 388 vdd rM ER 366 Ceea eme seed BEES BI NT IS 584 Clutch Fluid uu r vae PIS RES XS 584 Com Holders 3 26038 e s OR 291 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 387 Compact Disc CD Player llle 377 Compact Spare Tire 2l 475 Computer Trip Travel llle 328 Connector UCI i sta cote ese es beled eee 378 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 378 Console Floor 5 3 d e ERR 291 Console Overhead ee ees 271 Contract Service sou zs bea os eee had 623 Coolant Antifreeze lesen 607 en INDEX 633 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 581 Cooling System s ess e eet eae deis s 577 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 579 Coolant Level sosta Saket ae a 578 Disposal of Used Coolant 582 Drain Flush and Refill 0 578 l spection s ecce secie pesitseda seta he 582 Points to Remember 0050 582 Pressure Cap Sieti a euet e dasa eas 581 Radiator Cap sepas uerb Mu b hae a 581 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 578 Corrosion Protection 0 6 0 0 ese 588 Cruise Light emere RE vl Ca RI 320 Ciipholders i us eR Re ex gie de 290 Customer Assistance a ennad onea eane 621 Data Recorder Event llle 83 Daytime Brightnes
205. cle However if the vehicle is used for frequent trailer towing police fleet taxi etc change the fluid as indicated in the Maintenance Schedule In addi tion change the fluid and filter if equipped if the fluid becomes contaminated with water etc or if the trans mission is disassembled for any reason Manual Transmission If Equipped Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check The transmission is designed to be fill for life The oil does not need to be check unless there is an oil leak Should the transmission be leaking oil the transmission should be serviced to correct the condition Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri cant has become contaminated with water NOTE If contaminated with water the fluid should be changed immediately Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your v
206. cled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation WARNING Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and do not let children play with power windows Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode Occupants particularly unattended children can become en trapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Driver One Touch Down The driver door power window switch has an auto down feature Press the window switch to the second detent and release and the window will go down automatically ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto Down operation pull up on the switch briefly Front Windows Express Up And Down If Equipped Express Down Press the switch for less than a half a second and release The window will go down automatically Manual Down Press the switch for more than a half a second and release when you want the window to stop Express Up
207. could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop ee STARTING AND OPERATING 441 DRIVING THROUGH WATER Shallow Standing Water Driving through water more than a few inches Although your vehicle is capable of driving through centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure shallow standing water consider the following Cautions safety and prevent damage to your vehicle and Warnings before doing so Flowing Rising Water CAUTION WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface e Always check the depth of the standing water before dr
208. country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S Canada and Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the w button and say Setup followed by Emergency The Uconnect amp Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as com pared to using the mobile phone directly ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 WARNING To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emer gency your mobile phone must be e turned on paired to the Uconnect System e and have network coverage Roadside Assistance If you need roadside assistance e Press the w button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Roadside Assistance NOTE The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Roadside Assistance coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24 Hour Roadside Assistance references If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the w button and say Setup followed by Roadside Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automat
209. cupants or being used to secure child restraints An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child s reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of buckling it behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it Do not lock the seatbelt Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint Child restraint anchorages are designed to with stand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE
210. d 506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision CAUTION Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch system performance Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transmis sion Automatic Transmission If Equipped Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life Use only the manufacturer s specified transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and will require more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant should be used ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587 Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission Automatic Transm
211. d Con trol in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Full Speedometer Analog Or Digital Display Selection e Full Speedometer Analog Icon N Full Speedometer Digital Icon SPEED Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Analog or Digital display icon is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to change the display between analog and digital E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341 Vehicle Speed MPH Km h Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow MP button until the Vehicle Speed icon is high KM lighted in the EVIC Press the RIGHT arrow button to view a digital display of the current speed in MPH or km h Pressing the RIGHT arrow button a second time will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km h Press the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu NOTE Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the EVIC Vehicle Info Customer Information Features Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button and Coolant Temp will be displayed Press the UP or DOWN arrow button to scroll through the following information sub menus Tire Pressure Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Tire Pressure is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following will
212. d Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute ON OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you To m
213. d capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION y mn M i shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure e Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect ve hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control e Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Continued 470 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consump tion Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and
214. d discs may damage the CD player mechanism EJECT Button Ejecting A CD a Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF 372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner Shuffle SHFL And Repeat RPT This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the MENU button to display the Player menu Use the TUNE SCROLL knob to scroll to the Shuffle or Repeat sub menu Once the Shuffle or Repeat sub menu setting is highlighted press the ENTER BROWSE button to select
215. d on and off if the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC cor rects for over steering and under steering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC reduces engine torque and applies brake pressure to select individual wheels to mitigate vehicle under steer and vehicle over steer The system uses engine torque reduction along with individual wheel brake pressure to correct under steer and over steer conditions Over steer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Under steer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has two available operating modes 456 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Full On This is the normal operating mode for ESC Whenever the vehicle is started the system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted Refer to Partial Off for additional informa tion Partial Of
216. de edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain air bag is only about 4 inches 10 16 cm thick when it is inflated Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Acci dent Response System perform the following functions Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power until the ignition key is re moved Unlock the doors automatically In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response Syst
217. dent or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealer have the 622 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer They want to know if you need assistance If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con cer
218. din D 497 Fuel System Caution llle 498 lc P sided ane ee ane Pale GES Gos eS 595 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 273 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap esec tono amani tanssi 497 Gasoline Clean Air 0 0 ees 493 Gasoline Puel 00s sao seed Sk Re RR deed 492 Gasoline Reformulated 0 0008 493 Gauges Coolant Temperature 2 6 0 0 0 E AE 310 Fuel ik Seu bb ke rr Sha eet ee eg 314 Speedometer sieges agr llle 314 Tachometer siso ise bees eee eee 308 Gear Ranges sce eae dada SRS SY us 413 Gear Select Lever Override 0 550 General Information 000 163 Glass Cleaning se ssa ees ba ege ges s 593 Gross Axle Weight Rating lille 503 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 501 en INDEX 637 GVWR vase iG erg HO oe ae kee ara ea 501 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 133 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water cca es yea deed 441 Hazard Warning Flasher 04 519 Headlights Autotnatie oie Ned eatin pA ES aD eas 235 Cleaning ias bv die ic s e bg eb he eE i 593 Delay voce ive sepa ta ted ob dudum P EBA 235 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 240 Lights On Reminder sess 237 On With Wipers lee 235 Passing aa io Gane eR meee nes ER 240 Switchis sx peek ead LESE Cee ess 234 Mime Delay ss scera sc ee ad eee 235 Head Restraints 2 2 0 e eee eee 227 Heated Mirror
219. display will change to a LOW FUEL message This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL message and a new RTE value will display Press the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu Current Instantaneous Fuel Economy The feature displays instantaneous fuel economy in a bar graph below the RTE this function cannot be reset Press the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu Trip Info Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow A tri p button until the Trip Info icon is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to display the following three trip fea tures in the next screen e Trip A Si e Trip B 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Elapsed Time Elapsed Time 00 00 00 Elapsed Time 00 00 00 Distance 999 9 D 99 istance 999 9 Average mpg 00 Average mpg 00 PTA Trip A Trip Info Digital Display Trip Info Analog Display Press the UP DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions or press the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347 The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of t
220. ditional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Center Passenger First Row N A N A ALR Second Row ALR ALR ALR N A Not Applicable ALR Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger seating positions with a combination lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicl
221. dium Duty Class III Heavy Duty Class IV Extra Heavy Duty Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 506 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight 1 4L Turbo Engine Ratings Trailer towing is not recommended The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Frontal Area Max GTW Max Tongue Wt Gross Trailer Wt See Note 2 0L and 2 4L Auto 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 1 000 Ibs 450 kg 150 Ibs 50 kg Man Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information STARTING AND OPERATING 507 Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely from side to side which will cause loss of con tr
222. driver AutoStick mode and the transmission will return to should manually upshift the transmission as the the automatic mode until the problem is corrected yom eee To disengage AutoStick mode return the shift lever to e With 2 0L or 2 4L engine you can start out from a stop the DRIVE position You can shift in or out of the in first or second gear Tapping at a stop will AutoStick position at any time without taking your foot ra allow starting in second gear Starting out in second off the accelerator pedal gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions If a requested downshift would cause the engine to WARNING over speed that shift will not occur Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury e Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is en gaged Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged 440 STARTING AND OPERATING Se DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You
223. driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake System Warn ing Light is not on If the ABS Warning Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the ABS Warning Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light repaired as soon as possible STARTING AND OPERATING 449 If both the Brake System Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light remain on the ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not functioning Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated
224. ds These commands can be said on any screen when a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect voice command button SVR on the steering wheel Screen will change to Travel Link Screen will Screen will Screen will change to change to change to Screen will Screen will Screen will change to change to change to Travel Link Travel Link Travel Link Movie Travel Link Travel Link NFL Home Fuel Prices Weather Listings Sports Favorites Headlines 0475016864 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 NOTE 3 You can also say Show Current Weather or Show extended weather or Show five day forecast or 1 You can replace NFL with any league shown on the Show ski info to get other forecasts sports league screen For example you can say Show MLB headlines or Show PGA headlines NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold 2 You can replace Headlines with any menu items Ice ano Sate ety shown on a league screen For example you can say Show NFL Schedule and results or Show NCAA Basketball AP top 25 or Show Major League Baseball Teams 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Uconnect Voice Command Non phone Universal amp Mode Commads These commands can be spoken on any screen when not on a phone call after pushing the Uconnect voice command button evr on the steering wheel Navigation Cancels Route listening to G
225. ducts seal conditioners compressor oil or refrigerants Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film 574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshie
226. dule for the proper maintenance intervals 504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the brake system warning light is on Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear The brake fluid level should be checked when the pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a manual trans mission the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both the brake system and the clutch release system The two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak in one system will not affect the other system The manual transmission clutch release system should not require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle If the brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any leaks or other problems it may be a
227. e of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ee STARTING AND OPERATING 451 ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Trailer Sway Control TSC TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces sively swaying trailer TSC activates automatically once the excessively swaying trailer is recognized When TSC is functioning the ESC Light will flash the engine power will be reduced and you will feel the brake being applied to individual wheels in an attempt to stop the trailer from swaying NOTE The TSC is disabled when the
228. e the TPMS will not moni tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warn ing limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light and LOW TIRE PRESSURE and Inflate Tire to XX messages will still turn ON due to the low tire However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will be displayed for a mini mum of five seconds For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will be displayed for a minimum of five seconds Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 489 Premium System If Eq
229. e Change engine oil and filter e Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregu lar wear even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on e Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System Inspect brake pads shoes rotors drums hoses and park brake Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses Inspect exhaust system Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off road conditions M A l N T E N A N e E S e H E D U L E S 8 614 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Sx A W Maintenance Chart N i Mileage Or Time Passed Whichever Comes First S 8 8 8 888 8 888 S8 S8 S8 e je 7eTeiye see ei se S9 12 Q Q Q N e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Or Years 2 3 4 56 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 E OrKilometers 8 8 S is 888 88 isis isisis o 9 2 Q S Q Q Q Q Q 7 8 Q Q Q S N ceo bd e e N t e e N co t e ceo t e ceo o T N t e i o e N q Cc T r T v T N N N H Additional Inspections E Inspect CV joint boots X X X X X WUE Inspect front suspension tie rod ends and replace as M necessary x a s 3 Inspect brake linings parking brake function X X X X X X X 8 Additional Maintenance Replace the cabin air conditioning filter X X X X X X X Replace the engine air cleaner filter X X X X X Replace the spark plugs 1 4L Turbo
230. e Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach Lighting If Equipped Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal and puddle lamp contain three LEDs Two of the LED s are used as turn signal indicators which flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the vehicle Turning on the Hazard Warning flashers will also activate these LEDs The third LED supplies illuminated entry lighting which turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open any door This LED shines downward to illuminate the ground adjacent to the Front and Rear Doors The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about 30 seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the ignition is placed into the RUN position 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The approach lighting will not function when the shift lever is moved out of the PARK position Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the drivers door trim panel Power Mirror Control The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but tons and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a mirror press either the L left or R right button to select the mirror that you want to adjust Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This
231. e Of Tire 478 SROOURE EPRSHAIE MSS i radars dia Replacement Tires gt os cco llle 479 Epo Usage Ini Non ile Fuel NSHNGEO s syaani eR MMT In Gasoline 495 E TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES 480 cemere ae 406 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Materials Added To Fuel 495 Trailer Hitch Classification 505 Fuel System Cautions 000 495 Trailer Towing Weights Carbon Monoxide Warnings 496 Meena Jaen Wein HE IGUIMS con ludin SU B ADDING FUEL x sessssie ce rus innra 497 Tonic n a A a ene didtur 9 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap o o 0 eevee 497 Towing Requirements sess 508 lB VEHICLE LOADING sse 500 uus dl cM ML E 9m Vehicle Certification Label LL 500 E Coro P noni PEE 515 i UR TONUNG a a sese a Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 515 Common Towing Definitions 502 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 407 STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING Continued Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts in a location accessible io children and donot WARNING leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other e When leaving the vehicle always
232. e Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry RKE system and a feature of Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons NOTE Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information e If wearing gloves on your hands or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle the unlock sensitivity can be affected resulting in a slower re sponse time e Ifthe vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds the vehicle will re lock and if equipped will arm the security alarm To Unlock From The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver s door handle grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver s door automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger door handle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati cally The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked NOTE All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless
233. e back arrow soft key Phone Bluetooth After pressing the Phone Bluetooth soft key the fol lowing settings will be available 364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Paired Devices This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Supplement SiriusXM Setup After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft key the following settings will be available e Channel Skip SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection touch the Channel Skip soft key select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the back arrow soft key e Subscription Information New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio Following the expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re subscribe Touch the Subscription Info soft key to access the Sub scription Information screen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365 Uconnect 200 AM FM STEREO
234. e commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable The Uconnect Voice Command system allows laws including laws regarding phone use Your at We you to control your AM FM radio satellite tention should be focused on safely operating the radio disc player SD Card USB iPod and vehicle Failure to do so may result in a collision SiriusXM Travel Link causing serious injury or death NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Command When you press the Uconnect Voice Command system as calmly and normally as possible The ability of vr button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal the Voice Command system to recognize user voice give a command commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 If no command is spoken the system will say one of two responses e didn t understand e I didn t get that etc If a command is not spoken a second time the system will respond with an error and give some direction as what can be said based on the context you are in After three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR session will end Pressing the Uconnect Voice Command Eve button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can say a command This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE
235. e compass by pressing the ON soft key and completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Audio After pressing the Audio soft key the following settings will be available e BalancelFade When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363 e Equalizer When in this display you may adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the back arrow soft key NOTE Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch directly on the desired setting e Speed Adjusted Volume This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume touch the Off 1 2 or 3 soft key Then touch the back arrow soft key e Music Info Cleanup This feature helps organize music files for optimized music navigation To make your selection touch the Music Info Cleanup soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the back arrow soft key e Surround Sound If Equipped This feature provides simulated surround sound mode mm To make your selection touch the Surround Sound soft key select On or Off followed by pressing th
236. e control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving and many other situations Operation When the shift lever is in the AutoStick position beside the DRIVE position it can be moved forward and rearward This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used Moving the shift lever forward triggers a downshift and rearward 4 an upshift The current gear is displayed in the instrument cluster In AutoStick mode the transmission will shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever rearward or forward unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is cho sen except as described below For all models except GT the transmission will auto matically upshift when necessary to prevent engine over speed e For GT models the transmission will remain in the selected gear even when maximum engine speed is ee STARTING AND OPERATING 439 reached The transmission will upshift only when e If the system detects powertrain overheating the commanded by the driver Engine overspeed protec transmission will revert to automatic shift mode and tion is provided by the engine controls remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off e The transmission will automatically downshift to first e If the system detects a problem it will disable gear when coming to a stop After a stop the
237. e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e alo r O o W o lg o o cw co le o E a eap a e E Di E JE RINS fy Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter fey 2 0L 2 4L engines only if you frequently drive on SF rough or unpaved roads on mountain roads on short X X I trips in heavy city traffic during hot weather or while BJ towing a trailer or if you use the vehicle for police taxi or in a commercial fleet 3 Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary X EE Replace the timing belt 1 4L Turbo Engine X 8 The spark plug change interval is mileage based only yearly intervals do not apply es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 617 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic e Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve hicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A l N T E N A N c I S e H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech YOUR VEHICLE 0 0000 es 621 Impaired TDD TTY 000 623
238. e for the contact select 3 Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person which number you would like to have the message you wish to send the message to sent 2 Touch the messaging soft key then New Message 5 Press Send or Cancel 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Send Messages Using Voice Commands FM 95 5 1 Press the Se button arene Inbox 1 Yes 2 After the Listening prompt and the following beep eU say Send message to John Smith mobile 2 9 3 After the system prompts you for what message you HLan Etak nal now want to send say the message you wish to send or say 5 Ca me List There are 18 preset messages SNE Sie at aus While the list of defined messages are wie read you can 29 wd OFF mi n 1 1 4 Player Controls Climate Moro interrupt the system by pressing the VRbutton and iav saying the message you want to send Preset Message List List of Preset Messages 1 Yes 2 No 3 Okay After the system confirms that you want to send your message to John Smith your message will be sent ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 So ON D OF A I can t talk right now Call me TII call you later I m on my way Thanks TII be late I will be lt number gt minutes late 11 12 13 14 15 16 See you in number minutes Stuck in traffic Start without me Where are you Are you there yet
239. e it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE After pressing the SET button Cruise Control Set message is displayed for five seconds or until another switch is pressed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 For Premium Clusters Only e When set to analog mode The red outer line on the speedometer changes from red to white to identify set speed e When set to digital mode The MPH reading turns from white to red to identify set speed To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory NOTE After pressing the OFF button a Cruise Control Off message is displayed for five seconds or until another switch is pressed For Premium Clusters Only e When set to analog mode The white outer line on the speedometer returns to red When set to dig
240. e of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Center Console Outlet There is also a 12 Volt power outlet located in the center console This power outlet has power available only when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position 288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet e Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure QA 072765514 Underhood Fuses Power Outlet Fuses 1 F84 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter 2 F30 Fuse 20 A Yellow Center Console Outlet ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289 CAUTION CAUTION Continued e After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually
241. e surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc it may be damaged e g scratched reflective coat ing removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped 388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather This system can be operated through either the controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect 8 4 system display if equipp
242. e the autho rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the TIREFIT service kit 532 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME F Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement T 2 Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 clear in color Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area under the sealant bottle Press the Sealant Bottle release button The Sealant Bottle 1 will pop up Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous ing Position the new Sealant Bottle 1 in the housing so that the Sealant Hose 6 aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing Press the bottle into the housing An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 and return the hose to its storage area located on the bottom of the air pump 7 Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the vehicle JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to ge
243. e types Run Flat Tires If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles 80 km at 50 mph 80 km h after a rapid loss of inflation pressure This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of or below 14 psi 96 kPa Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi ately A Run Flat tire is not repairable It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor mation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 475 Spare Tires If Equipped NOTE For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a spare tire please refer to TIREFIT KIT in What To Do In Emergencies for further information CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option
244. e was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 es STARTING AND OPERATING 463 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure sure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures 464 STARTING AND OPERAT
245. e with a rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor ALR feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual e Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest Belt Pretensioning And Load Limitation The driver and passeng
246. ease the UP button once for each step A step from the last item in the list will cause the first item in the feature list to be displayed The following features are in the main menu Odometer Outside Temperature Display Digital Vehicle Speed e Trip Info Range To Empty Fuel Economy Info e Cruise Control Info e Stored Messages e Tire Pressure e Settings e Units e Language NOTE For features in the EVIC that can be reset Aver age Fuel Economy the EVIC prompts a reset with a RIGHT arrow button graphic and the word RESET next to it Trip Info Press and release the UP arrow button until the Trip Info icon is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to display the following three trip features in the next screen e Trip A ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 e Trip B e Elapsed Time Press the UP buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the ON RUN position Resetting A Trip Info Function To Reset any of the three Trip Info functions select the function you want to reset using the UP button Push the RIGHT
247. eat s cushion trim cover rear seat Each air bag deploys independently a left side impact deploys the left air bags only and a right side impact deploys the right air bags only Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC air bags may offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The SABIC deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side NOTE Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment Being too close to the side air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed The system includes side impact sensors that are cali brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that require air bag occupant protection SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system Occupants including children who are up against or very close to SABIC or SAB air bags can be seriously injured or killed 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Occupants especially children should not lean on or sleep against the door side windows or area where the SABIC or SAB air bags inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint Always sit upright as possible with your bac
248. eatback Release 644 INDEX a THINS ecrire Pctri te dE oom aca ens 223 Sectitity Alai eaii ea i ue his eee Greta we x 21 Selection of Oil cds mto 565 Sentry Key Immobilizer access rena aana 19 Sentry Key Programming 00004 20 Sentry Key Replacement 06 20 Service AssislanCe se e m s mh m Rd 621 Service Contract ss sss dye teed EU RR 623 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator 318 Service Manuals lille elles 626 Setting the Clock 6 6 eee 366 Shifting Manual Transmission lees 412 Shift Lever Override 1 0 0 0 0 00000000 550 Short Message Service SMS 00 161 Shoulder Belts risca 240 se RR RR ERR Ee 51 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 56 Side Airbag ies see E Rute ash ed 3 RR ERAS 78 Side View Mirror Adjustment 120 Signals T tfis cae uus re ac RR eO Ce s 111 SmartBeams llle 236 Snow Chains Tire Chains isses 480 Snow Miesse cute pac S IE re sd ERE 473 Spare Dite esce bet eee hee Redon ares eta 475 Specifications Oils 40 9 44 5 25 244685 Tenere MES den d 565 Speed Control Cruise Control 251 Speedometer 2 45 dart e EE er MI ee Us 314 Starting ciis es soa a ey ac d e ERR GE RES 28 Automatic Transmission sss 408 Engine Fails to Start llle 411 Manual Transmission 0000000 407 Remote 0 0 000 cee eee 28 Sta
249. ed Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings WARNING When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to the brakes axle engine transmission steer Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision Continued ing suspension chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK With a manual transmis sion shift the transmission into REVERSE Always block or chock the trailer wheels Continued 510 STARTING AND OPERATING xe WARNING Continued Check the tra
250. ed When the Uconnect 8 4 system is in different modes Radio Player Settings More etc the driver and pas senger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the display Manual Heating And Air Conditioning If Equipped The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs Y 6000 E Manual Climate Controls Hard Keys 1 Blower Control Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O OFF position There are seven blower speeds es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389 2 Recirculation Control e Recirculated air is not allowed in Defrost modes If the Recirculation button is pressed while in this mode the LED indicator will flash several times then go out Recirculation will be disabled automatically is this mode is selected Pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporar ily put the system in recirculation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate The A C can be deselected manually without dis NOTE turbing the mode control selection Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not reco
251. ed Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some services re quire immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can press the amp vRbutton and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the VR button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mai
252. ed to directly contact any surface Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag or micro fiber towel A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595 FUSES WARNING e When replacing a blown fuse always use an appro priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury fire and or property damage Before replacing a fuse make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and or disengaged e If the replaced fu
253. ed with e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake brake controller is not required system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a e Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 450 kg and required for trailers in excess of collision 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Towing any trailer will increase your stopping CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 450 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they distance When towing you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in a collision should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety 512 STARTING AND OPERATING The Trailer Tow Package may include a four pin and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle s wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connect
254. eeze can be used up to ten years or 150 000 Continued miles 240 000 km before replacement To prevent reduc ing this extended maintenance period it is important that may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended 580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M you use the same engine coolant OAT coolant conform ing to MS 12106 throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant antifreeze that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 12106 When adding engine coolant antifreeze e We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 Mix a minimum solution of 50 OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 12106 and distilled water Use higher concen trations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to
255. efcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Uconnect Phone Button The Uconnect Phone w Button is used to enter the phone mode and make calls show recent incoming outgoing calls view phone book etc When you press the button you will hear a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect amp Voice Command Button The Uconnect Voice Command Sve Button is t VR only used for barge in and when you are already in a call and you want to send Tones or make another call The EVR button is also used to access the Voice Com mands for the Uconnect Voice Command features if your vehicle is equipped Please see the Uconnect Voice Command section for direction on how to use the A vRbutton The Uconnect amp Phone is fully integrated with the ve hicles audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Ph
256. efully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner s Manual and on all the labels attached to the car seat Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada s website for additional information e http www tc gc ca eng roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index 53 htm 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Sx Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size Height Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have out grown the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Forward Facing Child Restraint with a five point Harness facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Larger Children Children who have out grown their forward facing child restraint but are too small to properly fit the vehicle
257. ehicle Outside ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589 parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants nants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve underbody protection hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water Washing The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of e Usea high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR paint and protective coatings from your vehicle Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect The most common causes are your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint What Causes Corrosion e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish e Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities 590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning m
258. ehicle has not been started or driven for at least 35 days 1 Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle 2 Place the ignition in the START position and release it when the engine starts 3 If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds place the ignition to the STOP OFF LOCK position wait five seconds to allow the starter to cool then repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure E STARTING AND OPERATING 411 CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not continuously If Engine Fails To Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded Leave the ignition key in the ON position release the accelerator pedal and repeat the Normal Starting procedure WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time Wait 60 seconds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up Turbocharger Cool Down If Equipped
259. ehicle has been freed press the ESC off switch again to restore ESC on mode CAUTION When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting be tween DRIVE 2nd gear and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drive train damage may result e Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no trans mission shifting occurring 550 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3 Remove the rubber storage tray liner from the center WARNING console then lift up the front of the shift lever bezel Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener carefully disengage the bezel from the shift lever ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or housing and slide it up to the top of the shift lever even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed J pe SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the TW following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 Turn the engine OFF Shift Lever Bezel 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 4
260. em functions after an event the ignition switch must be changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 WARNING As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufactu
261. em will request the appropriate visual alert only When the system is in RCP the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio volume is reduced Turn hazard signal status is ignored the RCP state always requests the chime Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 NOTE The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used Uconnect Phone Uconnect 200 Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehi cle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Version 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for supported phones For Uconnect phone compatibility visit http www UconnectPhone com or call 1 877 855 8400 Cana dian Residents visit http www
262. ency kHz Bit Rate kbps MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 Layer 3 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375 Playback Of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Enter Browse Button CD Mode For MP3 WMA Play Pressing the Enter Browse button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Se
263. eplace Mobile with Home Work or Other You can replace Incoming Calls with Outgoing Calls or Missed Calls You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number supported by your Mobile phone These commands can be used during a phone call after pushing the Uconnect amp Voice Command button on the steering wheel Please note the call will be muted while the VR session is active 6 Send dial tones for automated systems is available while a call is active This is an example that uses a Phonebook Record named Voicemail Password 7 Storing Dial tones in contact names is possible but only the first number encountered in a contact name will be sent For example if there is a number stored in the Home and Work numbers for the contact Voice mail password only the Home number will be sent 8 If your phone does not support phonebook download or call log download over Bluetooth then these commands will return a response that the contact does not exist in the phonebook 9 Emergency and Towing assistance are contacts that have been pre loaded in the phonebook Commands such as Call Emergency and Call Towing Assistance will call the corresponding number stored with those contacts NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Uconnect Text Messaging iE uo retort gid d she paterg Pa cornes
264. equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from your mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 e To call a name from the Uconnect Phonebook or downloaded Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible Only the mobile phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book However if there is less than 10 contacts in the mobile phone the SIM contacts may also download e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred a
265. equipped door handle is grasped If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is pro grammed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If driver door first is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter 360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection touch the Passive Entry soft key until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve hicle e Interior Motion Detection Alarm This feature will sound the vehicles alarm when motion is detected inside the vehicle while locked To make your selection touch the Interior Motion Detection Alarm soft key until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start After pressing the Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start soft key the following settings
266. er 378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss CD Player Operating Instructions Loading To insert disc into the player follow the instructions shown 1 Gently insert the disc with the label facing the rear of the vehicle while the light below the loading slot is illuminated The disc will automatically be pulled into the CD player 2 Upon insertion the disc will begin to play and the light below the loading slot will turn off EJECT EJT Button If there is a disc in the CD player press the EJT button and the disc will eject If you do not remove the disc within 10 seconds it will be reloaded Uconnect If Equipped If equipped with Uconnect 8 4 refer to the Uconnect 8 4 manual for further information iPod amp USB MP3 CONTROL WITH Uconnect VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates If equipped with Uconnect 8 4 refer to the Uconnect User s Manual for further details on iPod USB and MP3 usage Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external USB device to the vehicle s USB AUX connector port which is located in the center console Center Console
267. er Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rearward facing infant seat Only use a rearward facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt WARNING Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow
268. er allow children to ride in the front passenger The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the seat and never install a child restraint system including passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should a rearward facing infant seat in the front passenger seat be modified ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 In order for the OCS to operate as designed it is important for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt Properly seated passengers are Sitting upright Facing forward Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort ably on or near the floor Sitting with their back against the seat back and the seat back in an upright position Seated Properly 022665794 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING The OCS may not classify the front passenger properly if The front passenger s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle like the door arm rest or instru ment panel Occupants in the front passenger seat sitting improp erly may cause the OCS to not classify the passen ger s weight accurately This may result in serious injury or death in a collision Always wear your seat The front passenger leans forward sideways or turns belt and sit properly with the seat back in an upright around position your back against the seat back sitting e The front passenger seatback is not in the full upright uprigh
269. er front seating positions are equipped with seat belt systems that may incorporate retractor pretensioning devices anchor buckle preten sioning devices and load limiting devices These devices are designed to remove any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a collision These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt must still be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert amp BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder
270. er sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to pro gram while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed view To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button erase the channels while you press and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indi cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the garage door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained 4 Watch for the HomeLink indicat
271. er to the first detent position and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are four delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km h or less Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation CAUTION e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the Park posi tion before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 Mist Feature Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position to activate a
272. erature gauge reads If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle yy pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer turn signal on a continuous chime will sound to alert drops back into the normal range If the pointer you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes ata remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb turn the engine off immediately and call an autho 4 Temperature Gauge rized dealer for service The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 5 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Li
273. erious in Hood closed jury or death when inhaled e Trunk closed Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed could cause serious injury or death e Hazard switch off 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely e Remote Start Aborted Door Open e Remote Start Aborted Hood Open Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open e Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low e Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset e Remote Start Aborted Too Cold Remote Start Aborted Time Expired The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The vehicle doors will lock parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote
274. es vehicle speed 14 Power Steering System Warning This light is used to manage the electrical e warning of the EPS Power Steering System Refer to Power Steering in Starting and Operating for further information 15 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the X Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running imme diate service is required and you may experience reduced UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first placed in the ON RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 16 Air Bag Warning Light 0 t This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system i
275. esa 245 Fog Lis MER s a a Multifunction Lever 000 238 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 246 Mi PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF E TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN 248 EQUIPPED s ade 3px eS onde Rr od 255 E HEATED STEERING WHEEL ParkSense Sensors 2 60 0 eee 256 IF EQUIPPED 5423 eg ze reb OE RR os 249 ParkSense Warning Display 256 E ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED ParkSense Display llle 256 ieee Obed deere i a d Ead Rd RE cip edis 251 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense 264 TLO ACHV ate onera PRU en tat hae E a 252 Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist To Set A Desired Speed 0 252 SYSTE siae caries Ga de e ee a A 264 To Deactivate 6 6 lees 253 Cleaning The ParkSense System 267 To Resume Speed sic cie eee s 253 ParkSense System Usage Precautions 267 To Vary The Speed Setting 258 MI PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF To Accelerate For Passing 255 FOEICT ED jai a se amwitees s d Turning ParkView On Or Off With Touchscreen Radio llle 271 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
276. esistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections on the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesir able reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface 594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Instrument Panel Bezels CAUTION When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve hicle read the installation instructions carefully Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allow
277. exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the Key Fob When the ignition is in the OFF position the transmission is locked in PARK securing the ve hicle against unwanted movement e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob and lock your vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 423 WARNING Continued CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF position to the ON RUN position and also press e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain or the shift lever Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with The following indicators should be used to ensure that Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi mode A child could operate power windows other tion controls or move the vehic
278. f The ESC Off button is located in the switch bank above the climate control To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily press the ESC Off button and the ESC Off Indicator Light will illuminate To turn the ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off button and the ESC Off Indicator Light will turn off This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation WARNING When in Partial Off mode the TCS functionality of ESC except for the limited slip feature de scribed in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated When in Partial Off mode the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys tem is reduced e Trailer Sway Control TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode NOTE When driving with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to allow more wheel spin when starting off in snow mud sand gravel or when using tire chains This can be accomplished by momentarily pressing the ESC off button to enter partial mode Partial Off mode Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the ESC Off button This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light position It should go out with the engine running The ESC
279. f 91 octane or higher is recommended 2 0L And 2 4L Engine 800dfab8 This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when us gd ing high quality unleaded regular gaso 5 line having an octane rating of 87 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 493 Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWEC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and d
280. for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for 9 four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable 110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Floor Mat Safety Information WARNIN
281. form the following facilities using recovery and recycling equipment procedure to replace the filter NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system 1 Remove the passenger side console closeout located PAG compressor oil and refrigerants on the right side of the center console AIC Air Filter SG Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Do not remove the A C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result 072670339 Passenger Side Console Closeout 572 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 Disengage the retaining tab that secures the filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover u 072670284 Air Conditioning Filter Removal N 4 Install the A C air filter with the air filter position Filter Cover Retaining Tab indicators pointing in the same direction as removal 3 Remove the A C air filter by pulling it straight out of When installing the filter cover make sure the retain the housing Take note of the air filter position indica ing tab fully engages the cover tors ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 573 CAUTION The A C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often 5 Install the passenger side console closeout NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak pro
282. from the jack assembly ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 535 WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Jacking And Changing A Tire WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher help prevent personal injury or damage to your 3 Set the parking brake vehicle e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the spre ee lever into PARE edge of the roadway as possible before raising the 5 Turn OFF the ignition vehicle e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher e Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised jacking position For example if e Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic 6 Block the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the changing the right front tire block transmission in PARK a manual transmission in the left rear wheel REVERSE 060505162 Continued 536 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Continued e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised
283. front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle C STARTING AND OPERATING 467 NOTE 9 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX Ibs or XXX kg The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 295 kg since 5 x 150 Ibs 68 kg 750 Ibs 340 kg and 1400 Ibs 635 kg 750 Ibs 340 kg 650 Ibs 295 kg Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and l
284. g The following items are selectable Radio Mode e Audio Selecting the Audio sub menu will allow you to adjust the Bass Mid Range Treble Balance or Fade just like pressing the Audio hard control If the BACK button is pressed the radio will return to the Main Menu Clock Selecting Clock will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369 ENTER BROWSE button to set the minutes The min utes will highlight Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the ENTER BROWSE button to save time change Player Mode e Player Browse Selecting Player Browse will go to the appropriate browse menu depending on the device currently playing will function the same as pressing the browse button while in that mode This will only appear in the menu if the device currently playing can support these features Shuffle SHFL This function shuffles randomizes the order of the files This will only appear in the menu if the device currently playing can support these features Repeat RPT When Repeat is activated the cur rently playing song will begin again when it ends It will continue to cycle through the same song until repeat is turned Off Repeat will be turned off once one for the following conditions are met 1 The source is ejected 2 A different track list wi
285. g More than X Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH Restraint System Anchor Tether We LATCH The next generation of child safety 022668173 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH equipped child seats There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position These anchorages are used to install LATCH equipped child seats without using the vehicle s seat belts Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages In these seating positions the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint Please see the following table for more information 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 0226002256 e Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seat ing position e S Top Tether Anchorage Symbol en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 What is the weight limit child s weight 4 weight of the child restraint for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat be
286. g conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified Grade SN or better and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 1 4L Turbo Engine MOPAR SAE 5W 40 synthetic engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil or Shell Helix is recommended for all oper ating temperatures This engine oil improves low tem perature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity grade for your engine Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 2 0L And 2 4L Engine MOPAR SAE 0W 20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil or Shell Helix is recommended for all operating tem peratures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity grade for your engine Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Disp
287. g fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 To hear the first available Menu press the Voice Com mand VR button and say Help or Main Menu Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands and Local commands Universal commands are available at all times Local com mands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing The Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command amp vR button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com mand system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command SVR button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio AM to switch to the radio AM mode e Radio FM to switch to radio FM mode e Sat to switch to Satellite radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e USB to switch to USB mode Bluetooth Streaming to switch to Bluetooth Streaming mode Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEAT
288. g the recent calls soft key on the Phone main screen You can also press the w button and say Show my incoming calls from any screen and the Incoming calls will be displayed You can also press the w button and say Show my recent calls from any screen and the All calls screen will be displayed NOTE Incoming can also be replaced with Outgoing Recent or Missed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem Press the button to accept the call You can also touch the answer soft key or touch the caller ID box Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the phone w button answer soft key or caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress You can place a call on hold by touching the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen
289. g the AutoStick shift control select the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids frequent downshifts For example choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed To prevent excess heat generation avoid continuous driving at high RPM Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily ee STARTING AND OPERATING 515 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission Flat Tow None e Transmission in NEU NOT ALLOWED TRAL Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED On Trailer Al
290. g the air bags to inflate to the full size The air bags fully inflate in about 15 to 20 milli seconds Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based the severity and type of collision ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Based on the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflators on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SABs exit through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SABs fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the outsi
291. g their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the Sve button for five seconds until the session begins or ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 e Press the Sve button and say the Voice Training System Training or Start Voice Training com mand You can either press the Uconnect Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be com pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only Reset e Press the w button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Reset This will delete all phone pairing phone book entries and other settings in all language modes The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings Voice Command Uconnect Voice Command Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the Voice Command features press the VR button and say Voice Command Tuto rial For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least inch 1 cm gap be
292. ght If Equipped Lal ee The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON RUN e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 6 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped 4 7 Engine Temperature Warning Light This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on _ This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion If the engine coolant temperature is too high this indicator will illuminate and a single chime w
293. ght MIL is part of an Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when placing the ignition in ON RUN from the OFF position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 Certain conditions such as poor fuel quality etc may WARNING sd aoe WARNING illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will above can reach higher temperatures than in normal drive normally and will not require towing operating conditions This can cause a fire if you CAUTION drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator others Light MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and 27 Transmission Temperature Warning Light If driveability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic Equipped converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required This light indicates that the transmission fluid E temperature is
294. h a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for brak ing the vehicle Towing With HSA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer WARNING If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas ing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle e HSA is not a parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 455 WARNING Continued e Failure to follow these warnings may cause the vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide with another vehicle object or person and cause serious or fatal injury Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle NOTE The HSA system may also be turne
295. have the letter T or S molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design ram standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 460 STARTING AND OPERATING Ses Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T or S Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 461 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification
296. he call will remain within the vehicle audio system until the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth connection It is recommended to press the transfer soft key when leaving the vehicle Uconnect Phone Features Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and connected to the Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature 1 Press the button to begin 2 After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Dial Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE in emergency situations when the mobile phone has network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect Phone A i ine Assi The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the Readers Ansistance Tuwung sistance touchscreen If you need roadside towing assistance The emergency number dialed is based on the country 1 Press the w button to begin where
297. he hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE LIGHTS Headlight Switch TE The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel This switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instru ment panel lights instrument panel light dimming inte rior lights and fog lights 031463855 Headlight Switch Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight parking light and instrument panel light op eration ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO position When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF position To turn the automatic system off move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come on in the automatic mode Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights
298. he radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle If engine coolant anti freeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freez ing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at a minimum of 50 OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 and distilled water for proper corrosion protec tion of your engine which contains aluminum compo nents Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583 Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emis sions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Sche
299. he retractor Then allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking sound This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor If it is locked you should not be able to pull out any web bing If the retractor is not locked repeat step 5 Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103 strap See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a tether anchor 9 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching Latch Plate CINCH If Equipped 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be
300. he vehicle moves closer to the obstacle the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from fast to continuous AM 760 WJR hz UN F3 One Half Second Tone UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259 AM 760 WJR AM 760 WJR MF FH MPH adi B R 032766807 032766806 Slow Tone Slow Tone 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE AM 760 WJR AM 760 WJR MPH R 032766804 032766801 Fast Tone Fast Tone UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261 AM 760 WJR AM 760 WJR MPH Z2 MPH R R 032766802 6 032766808 Fast Tone Continuous Tone 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M AM 760 WJR Continuous Tone R 032766805 The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert opera tion when the system is detecting an obstacle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263 WARNING ALERTS Rear Dis Greater 79 59 in 59 47 in 47 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than tance than 200 150 150 120 120 100 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 12 in 30 in cm 79 in 200 cm cm cm cm cm Audible None Single 1 2 Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous Alert Second for rear for rear for rear Chime Tone center center center for rear only only only center only Arc Left
301. her information The ParkSense amp Warning screen is located within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation ParkSense Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status AM 760 WJR hz is Park Assist Ready 990o Park Assist Ready UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257 AM 760 WJR EST H R Py Park Assist System Off 9090 032766800 032766810 Park Assist System Off The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle s distance and location relative to the vehicle 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region the display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region and will produce a one half second tone As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous If an obstacle is detected in the left and or right rear region the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and or right rear region and will produce a fast sound tone As t
302. highlight a screen setup location i e Upper Left Upper Right etc then press the RIGHT arrow button to select the location and make changes Press the UP and DOWN buttons to select the information you would like to display in that location i e Date Time Outside Temp etc and press the RIGHT arrow button to save the display setting You can press the LEFT arrow button at any time to back out of a sub menu selection NOTE The Screen Setup items are only available at speeds less than 5 mph 8 km h All other menu items are not active when in Screen Setup If the vehicle is shifted into gear this feature is locked out and the main screen will display Screen Setup Unavailable While In Motion ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349 Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items Time e Speedometer Range To Empty RTE Analog 1 Average MPG Analog 2 Current MPG Digital 1 default setting Trip A Digital 2 Trip B e Gear Display e Upper Right Standard PRND default setting None Single Character D Compass default setting Word Drive Outside Temp e Upper Left Time None Range To Empty RTE Compass Average MPG Outside Temp default setting Current MPG 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Trip A Trip B Lower Left None default setting Compass Outside Temp Time e Lower Right None default setting Compass Outside Temp Time e Restore To Defaults Restores All Settings To De fault
303. hone keypad you can utilize the touchscreen or press the Sve button and say the word Send then the sequence you wish to enter For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the Sve button and say Send 3 7 4 6 Saying Send followed by a number or sequence of numbers is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries For example if you previously created a Phone book entry with First and or Last Name as Voicemail ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 Password then if you press the Sve button and say Send Voicemail Password the Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e The first number encountered for that contact will be sent All other numbers entered for that contact will be ignored You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Pauses wait or other characters that are supported by some phones are not supported over Bluetooth These additional symbols will be ignored in the d
304. hones e Connect My Phone Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the high est priority paired phone and or Audio Device within range If you need to choose a particular phone or Audio Device follow these steps T 2 Touch the Settings soft key Touch the Paired Phone or Paired Audio Source soft key Touch to select the particular Phone or the particular Audio Device Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device 1 Touch the Settings soft key 2 Touch the Paired Phone or Audio Device soft key 3 Touch the soft key located to the right of the device name 4 The options pop up will be displayed 5 Touch the Disconnect Device soft key 6 Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device 1 Touch the Settings soft key 2 Touch the Pair Phone or Audio Device soft key ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 3 Touch the soft key located to the right of the 6 Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen device name for a different Phone or Audio Device than the currently connected device Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If Equipped A The GDRODS Pep up will be displayer If equipped and specifically supported by your phone 5 Touch the Delete Device soft key Uconnect amp Phone automatically down
305. how the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mecha nism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out 444 STARTING AND OPERATING Se of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Continued WARNING Continued Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle
306. ht that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 6 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door opener device does not acti vate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remaining steps Programming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 eS O1 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to pro gram while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Simultaneously press and
307. ialing a numbered sequence Barge In Overriding Prompts The VR button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking There are two numbers with the name John Say the full name you could press the AVR button and say John Smith to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Voice Response Length It is possible for you to choose between Brief and Detailed Voice Response Length 1 Touch the More soft key where available then touch the Settings soft key 2 Touch the Display soft key then scroll down to Voice Response Length 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Select either Brief or Detailed by touching the box next to the selection A check mark will appear to indicate your selection Phone And Network Status Indicators Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempt ing to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength and phone battery strength Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Chrysler Group LLC strongly recommends that you use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility
308. ice If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with dis abilities contact your authorized dealer en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately e ry The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first cycled to the ON RUN position e The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the f
309. ice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws including laws regarding phone use Your at tention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you press the Voice Command EVR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the Voice Command EVR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the Voice Command VR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditionin
310. ide in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision best Continued 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and your injuries in a collision much worse You might adjust the front seat suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Pulling Out The Lap Shoulder Belt Latch Plate The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a clic
311. ife and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 630 INDEX MM ABS Anti Lock Brake System 447 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 579 Adding Fuels 42er PR Re pA b 497 Adding Washer Fluid ocete tatea sece aaas 574 Additives E el i4 dde doe BES A Oa eod 495 DWprpc PET 61 Airbag Deployment s sss toisia mae tadeg mewe 80 Airbag Light e cesso jee n 68 Airbag Maintenance lille 82 Airbag Sides s ange eng e teg nate hate g eeia id 65 Airbag Window Side Curtain 65 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 567 Air Conditioner Maintenance 0 569 Air Conditioning selle 388 Air Conditioning Controls 0 388 Air Conditioning Filter sses essri llle 402 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 569 Air Conditioning System eese earba ses esras 388 Air Pressure Tires
312. ight monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate
313. iler tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage GCWR must not be exceeded f LL e Total weight must be distributed between the tow Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage vehicle and the trailer such that the following four before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General ratings are not exceeded Information in Starting and Operating for the proper inspection procedure GVWR e When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor PIN mation in Starting and Operating for proper tire GAWR replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Tires Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe This could cause inadequate braking and possible and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to personal injury Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for proper tire inflation procedures ee STARTING AND OPERATING 511 e An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is WARNING required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipp
314. ill sound If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further information For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information 8 High Beam Indicator This indicator shows that the high beam head lights are on Push the multifunction lever for ward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam 9 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON RUN position this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Re minder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 10 Brake Warning Light This l
315. illar Location 2 0 0 cee ee es 464 Brake Assist System 00000000005 449 Brake Control System Electronic 446 Brake Fluid soree 2m oc Kedah oa POE du aed 610 Brake Parking 2 sse n s 442 Brake System sa iesu ce eR ERROR ed des 583 Anti Lock ABS l l 447 Master Cylinder 0 204224 240464004 Boag 584 Warning Light 0 0 0 2 e eee eee ee 313 Brake Transmission Interlock sss 418 Brightness Interior Lights ces cissie a anaa 241 Bulb Replacement 0 00 00 0 niek eee 602 Bulbs Light lt cees ise RR an 111 Camera Real cde ea Ee v eus Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 632 INDEX eee Capacities Fluid i 2 221 x3 au md 607 Caps Filler Puelizisioaded9 9e RR e3 he DERE das 497 OU ENGINE 3 adopter ate oe 558 Radiator Coolant Pressure 581 Carbon Monoxide Warning 108 Cargo Area Features 2a 034 40 4 4060000 es 295 Cargo Compartment 000 295 Car Washes seseque oe RU aom diye ups 589 CD Compact Disc Player llle 377 Cellular PHONE s eregas iaa prenan ee 133 Chains Tir 525 325 054 e eas ex eas 480 Changing A Flat Tire llle 532 Chart Dre Sizing 9 iere Ep Ry Red 460 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 318 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety i i 107 Checks Satety ex ce e e ene Ret 107 Child Restraints a0 cree ee m a 84 Child Safety Lo
316. in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 ITY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety 626 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor mation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintain ing servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is
317. in sensing wiper operation can resume if it has been selected and no other inhibit conditions mentioned previously exist 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column To unlock the steering column pull the control handle down To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the control handle up until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steer
318. ing feature will not operate when the wiper speed is in the low or high position ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 e The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind shield e Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the wiper blades and arms It will not operate under the following conditions Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN position the vehicle is stationary and the outside temperature is below 32 F 0 C unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside temperature rises above freezing Neutral Wipe Inhibit The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN position the automatic transmission shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph 8 km h unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position Remote Start Mode Inhibit On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the ON RUN position ra
319. ing the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is released NOTE If the flash to pass is held for 20 seconds the feature will deactivate Front Map Reading Lights The lights also turn on when a door is opened The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE Lights are mounted in the overhead console Each light is pressed can be turned on by pressing the lens Front Map Reading Lights To turn the lights off press the lens a second time ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 Interior Lights Dimmer Controls The interior lights come on when a door is opened The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off located on the left side of the instrument panel automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open This includes the glove box light but not the trunk light To restore interior light operation either turn the ignition to the ON RUN position or cycle the light switch 031463856 Dimmer Controls 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE With the parking lights or headlights on rotating the left Ambient Light Control dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of R he right di l the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders
320. ing wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System Touch the Controls soft key then touch the Heated Wheel soft key to turn on the heated steering wheel Press the Heated Wheel soft key a second time to turn the heated steering wheel off SAT browse Sy Player 70 out 6 950 1600 gt A NW n Nav Phone More EVE OFF Controls Climate Controls Soft Key 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se FM 95 5 during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Controls x yf Sen Seat e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin Oi ices LA because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus UNE r em m tion or other physical conditions must exercise Radio Playor Controis Clim ie Phone Moro care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if Heated Steering Wheel Soft Key used for long periods NOTE The engine must be running for the heated Do not place anything on the steering wheel that steering wheel to operate insulates against heat such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material This may Vehicles Equipped Wi
321. ion system WARNING Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electri cal spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury Only use the specific ground point do not use any other exposed metal parts 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 548 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 6 Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence Disconnecting The Jumper Cables L Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough without engine operation the vehicle s
322. ions soft key next to appropriate Favorite that is to be 68 FM ERA ou y 72 Phonebook gt E Voicemail Ca Edit Number Reset to Default fi Pepe Roni Cd Buddy s Pizza 0456012195 Emergency And Breakdown Assistance 5 The Options pop up will appear and you can choose between Editing the number or resetting the number to default 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available and supported by Bluetooth on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service pro vider for the features that you have Ways To Initiate A Phone Call Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call with Uconnect Phone e Redial e Dial by touching in the number e Voice Commands Dial by Saying a Name Call by Saying a Phonebook Name Redial or Call Back e Favorites Mobile Phonebook Recent Call Log e SMS Message Viewer Dial By Saying A Number 1 Press the w button to begin 2 After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Dial 151 1234 5555 3 The Uconnect Phone will dial the number 151 1234 5555 Call By Saying A Phonebook Name 1 Press the w button on your steering wheel to begin 2 After the
323. ird time to shut the heating elements OFF 4 Uu 95 5 1 M se Hesiod C Hoated Seren be OFF Controls Passenger looted Ye Driver D H L 1 wf Radio Player Controls OFFER Climate Nav More Phone Heated Seats Soft Keys NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the Hl level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal Hl level If the HlI level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LO level after ap proximately 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the display will change from HI to LO indicating the change The LO level setting will turn OFF automati cally after approximately 45 minutes Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s heated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Hn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 Head Resiraints Active Head Restraints Front Seats Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with by restricting head movement in the event of a rear Active Head Restraints AHR In the event of a rear impact Head restraints should
324. is attached to the anchorage Center Seat LATCH Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attach ments in the center seating position Only install this type of child restraint in the outboard seating positions Child restraints with flexible webbing mounted lower attach ments can be installed in any rear seating position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 WARNING To Install A LATCH compatible Child Restraint 1 If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR seat belt stow the seat belt following the instructions below See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt to check what type of seat belt each seating position has Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints next to each other you must use the seat belt for the center position You can then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard positions Please refer to Installing The LATCH 2 Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the Compatible Child Restraint System for typical in tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily stallation instructions attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu facturer when installing your child restraint Not
325. is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driv ing encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible and that you become aware of appli cable laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 dialing a number with your connected Bluetooth mo bile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice a command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute ON OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you To mute the Uconnect Phone simply touch the Mute button on the Phone main screen Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile
326. ission automatically upshifts through underdrive first second third and fourth gears direct fifth gear and overdrive sixth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driv ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section for further information to select a lower gear Under these condi tions using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup 436 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat ing limits the transmission controller will modify the transmission shift schedule and expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating If the transmission becomes extremely hot the Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may operate differently until the transmis sion cools down During very cold temperatures 4 F 20 C or below transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed Normal operation will resume once the transmis sion temperature has risen to a suitable level Trans
327. ission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions Routine fluid level checks are not required therefore the transmission has no dipstick Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc tion visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the fluid level checked Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission dam age CAUTION If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your autho rized dealer immediately Severe transmission dam age may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately 588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Fluid and Filter Changes Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehi
328. ital mode The MPH reading returns from red to white To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of To Decrease Speed De enor Meme aaa When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can de U S Speed mph crease speed by pushing the SET button e Pressing the RES button once will result ina 1mph The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the Of U S mph or Metric km h units button results in an increase of 1 mph U S Speed mph e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Metric Speed kmlh e Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will e Pressing the RES button once will result in a continue to decrease until the button is released then 2 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the new set speed will be established the butt
329. ived by the radio NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded grey 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Hands Free Music Control These commands can be spoken when playing music from your SD card USB device CD or IPod after pushing the Uconnect voice commands button of vr on the steering wheel Radio will play the the album R a Radio will play e A Audio Book Dr Radio will play Ragtime the Artist Scott Song Maple Leaf the Genre Rock the Playlist Party Podcast Weekly Jekyll and Mr track B Favorites Joplin Rag Tunes Auto Podcast Hyde Radio will play Radio will play Radio will play the Radio will play Radio will play the 0475016865 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 NOTE 3 Playlist Podcast and audio book commands are only 1 You can replace the album artist song genre playlist available whey aie dPOUI OS connectes and payne podcast and audio book names with any correspond 4 VR commands Albums Artists and Genre names are ing names on the current device that is playing based on the music metadata contained on the 2 You can replace 8 with any track on the CD that is REE E mm currently playing Command is only available when NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold CD is playing face and shaded grey 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Uconnect Voice Command Travel Link comman
330. iving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water e Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Continued 442 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Continued WARNING Driving through standing water may cause damage Driving through standing water limits your vehi to your vehicle s drivetrain components Always cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil trans 8 km h when driving through standing water mission axle etc for signs of contamination i e e Driving through standing water limits your vehi Eu Hiat rsumisy s foamy appearance atier cle s braking capabilities which increases stopping driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami nated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside
331. jury or death Uconnect Phone Button The steering wheel controls will contain the two control buttons Uconnect Phone w but ton and Voice Command Sve button that will enable you to access the system When you press the Uconnect Phone button you will hear a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Voice Command Button 4 VR The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details When you press the Voice Command Sve but ton you will hear a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as Phone or caller ID Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep
332. k Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 WARNING e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop erly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron gest bones will take the force in a collision Continued 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if you from injury during a collision You are more it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt belt in a collision are meant to be used together
333. k against the seat back use the seat belts properly and use the appropriate sized child restraint infant restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child WARNING Your vehicle is equipped with left and right SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the side curtain air bag is located should remain free from any obstructions Continued WARNING Continued Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the SAB the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require perma nent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger and position the front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver and Pas senger Side Knee Air Bags and the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front
334. ke Fluid Low Remote Start Active Key to Run e Remote Start Active Push Start Button e Service Electronic Braking System Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low Remote Start Aborted Too Cold Remote Start Aborted Door Open e Engine Temperature Hot e Battery Voltage Low Service Electronic Throttle Control e e Remote Start Aborted Hood Open 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e e e e e e Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open Remote Start Aborted Time Expired Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset Service Airbag System Service Airbag Warning Light Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled Front Seatbelts Unbuckled Door Open Doors Open Trunk Open Gear Not Available Shift Not Allowed e Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse e Autostick Unavailable Service Required e Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake Trans Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool Transmission Cool Ready to Drive Service Transmission Service Shifter Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling Transmission Too Cold Idle With Engine On e Washer Fluid Low The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white telltales area on the right amber telltales in the middle and red telltales on the left UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337 EVIC Amber Telltales If this telltale turns on safely pull over and stop the vehicle Then
335. killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can Continued WARNING Continued eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate rear doors open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109 Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas
336. l Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column 022663963 Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 Supplemental Driver And Passenger Side Knee Air Bags Knee Bolsters NOTE The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags are certified to new Federal regulations The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors including the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 This vehicle may be equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system OCS that may adjust the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag based upon occupant weight This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC air bags are located above
337. l or when sending a page before speaking the digit string make sure to say Send NOTE It is recommended that you do not store names in your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion Phonebook Mobile and Favorites name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar You can say O letter O for 0 zero ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 Even though international dialing for most number com binations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported Far End Audio Performance Audio quality is maximized under Low To Medium Blower Setting Low To Medium Vehicle Speed Low Road Noise Smooth Road Surface Fully Closed Windows e e e Dry Weather Conditions e Operation From The Driver s Seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Voice Text Reply Uconnect amp Phone can read or send new messages on your phone 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth to use this feature If the Uconnect Phone determines your phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over Bluetooth the Messaging butto
338. l OK OK NOTE When recreationally towing your vehicle always follow applicable state and provincial laws Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details 516 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION NOTE Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may be recreationally towed flat towed at any legal highway speed for any distance if the manual transmis e DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an sion is in the NEUTRAL position automatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain will result If these vehicles require towing make sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground Do not dolly tow this vehicle Use of a towing dolly can cause significant damage to your vehicle Dam age from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re quirements can cause severe transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered un der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS E HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS 519 Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT 527 Bl IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS 519 Bl JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 532 E WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage 533 SPECIFICATIONS eeseeeeeen 520 Preparations For Jacking Torque Specifications
339. l and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the Sve button and say Send The system will prompt you to say the number If you wish to send the name say Send Name followed by a valid name from the phonebook Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Sve button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the w button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say one of the following Setup Confirmation Prompts On Setup Confirmation Prompts Off Phone An
340. l flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure values Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The 492 STARTING AND OPERATING vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses KR55WY9012 7812D 5WY9012 United States Canada FUEL REQUIREMENTS 1 4L Turbo Engine This engine is designed to meet all emis sion regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso line having an octane rating of 87 For optimum performance and fuel economy the use o
341. l the release cable 0568015203 Release Cable VEHICLE LOADING As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to the driver s door B Pillar The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Vehicle Identification Number VIN Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number VIN ee STARTING AND OPERATING 501 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full
342. ld Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as neces sary Adding Washer Fluid The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment and the fluid level should be checked at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575 Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice
343. le e When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position 424 STARTING AND OPERATING Se With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever WARNING will not move out of PARK REVERSE R Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the uu ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe This range 1S for moving the vehicle backward Shift into practices that limit your response to changing traffic REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete Or road conditions You might lose control of the stop vehicle and have a collision NEUTRAL N Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged CAUTION periods with the engine running The engine may be Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information es STARTING AND OPERATING 425 DRIVE D This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatical
344. le Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos sible e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision 298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE iS Cargo Tie Downs Ski Pass Through The rear cargo area is equipped with cargo tie downs There is a ski pass through door located behind the rear located on either side of the rear cargo area seat armrest that allows longer items such as snow skis N to be stored in the rear cargo area Lower the armrest and pull downward on the latch to open the ski pass through door Cargo Tie Downs 030964928 a Ski Pass Through UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299 REAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION Rear Window Defroster e Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements ste The rear window defroster button is located on e Use care when washing the inside of the rear the climate control Press this button to turn on the window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth equipped An indica
345. le manually ing Your Instrument Panel for further information 446 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE vehicle stability and control in various driving condi tions e Even if the power steering assistance is no longer operational it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial WARNING increase in steering effort especially at low speeds and Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot prevent the during parking maneuvers natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing e If the condition persists see your authorized dealer for service road conditions ESC cannot prevent accidents in cluding those resulting from excessive speed in ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capa bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system This system includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Brake Assist System BAS Traction Control System TCS Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM Trailer Sway Con
346. le the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the Key Fob When the ignition is in the OFF position the transmission is locked in PARK securing the ve hicle against unwanted movement e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob and lock your vehicle Continued WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 434 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF position to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the
347. le the window controls press and release the window lockout button setting it in the DOWN position To enable the window controls press and release the window lockout button again setting it in the UP position Window Lockout Switch en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel NOTE The transmission must be in PARK before the button will operate The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter twice within five seconds or by using the external release switch located on the underside of the decklid overhang The release feature will function only when the vehicle is in the unlock condition 46 THINGS TO KNOW B
348. lecting a folder by pressing the ENTER BROWSE button will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode For MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode 376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speak ers Pressing the PLAYER button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The head unit will have no control of the AUX device You can only control the volume on the head unit No information about the song will be displayed e The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio so
349. ll bring up Browse mode List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the audio device In Browse mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or external USB device Preset 1 Playlists Preset 2 Artists e Preset 3 Albums Preset 4 Genres Preset 5 Audiobooks Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line To exit Browse mode without making a selection press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode Browse button The Browse button will display the top level menu of the iPod or external USB device Press and then turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to list the top menu item to be selected and press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to select This will dis play the next sub menu list item on the audio device then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod or external USB device sub menu levels are available on this system A B C button For all player devices pressing the A B C button while browsing will present an ABC jump feature The system will show the available first letters of the item being browsed If letters do not have items they will not be shown will be shown in their place After selecting a letter you will be taken to es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383 the first item of that letter within the entire
350. llle 470 Alarm Light dace eer RO Re Rem os 316 Alarm Panic gods tg tearb ane du ORC SERE DOE 26 Alarm Security Alapi e esst e minena i a 21 Alarm System Security Alarm 21 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antifreeze Engine Coolant iliis 578 Capacities se e pese ded in hos EORR eked 607 Dispos l sss cierta qubd Pur redoog 582 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 0 447 Anti Lock Warning Light llle 318 Appearance Care o aiee piacon lees 588 Arming System Security Alarm 21 Assistance Towing atadian ainai eee 147 Assist Hill Start 0 llle 452 Auto Down Power Windows lesen 42 Automatic Dimming Mirror isses 119 Automatic Door Locks sesers seanna ea e aes 34 Automatic Headlights 000 235 Automatic Temperature Control ATC en INDEX 631 Automatic Transmission Adding Fluid Fluid and Filter Changes Fluid Level Check Fluid Type Gear Ranges Special Additives Autostick Auto Unlock Doors Auto Up Power Windows Batter ys alse ota atcha ema d voe ob dat et tia dos Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE Belts Seat Bluetooth Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone 0 0 00 168 Body Mechanism Lubrication 573 B P
351. llowing Change the engine oil and oil filter Disconnect and reconnect the battery Drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel ee STARTING AND OPERATING 495 MMT In Gasoline MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor man
352. loads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website www UconnectPhone com for sup ported phones 6 Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen 1 Touch the Settings soft key 2 Touch tier Phone Bluetooth solt key e To calla name from a downloaded mobile phone book 3 Touch the soft key located to the right of the follow the procedure in the Voice Recognition Quick device name Reference section Automatic download and update of a phone book if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle 4 The options pop up will be displayed 5 Touch the Make Favorite soft key you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible This downloaded phone
353. lt be used together to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint Can a child seat be installed in the 65 Ibs 29 5 kg No Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH anchorage system once the com bined weight is more than 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages Yes You can install child restraints with flexible lower anchors in the center position The inner anchorages are 17 inches 440 mm apart Do not install child restraints with rigid lower anchors in the center position 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage No Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact See your
354. ltifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column mist eau Ore 32 201 TTA LS T WIPER Se Ro 031563089 Multifunction Lever Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 NOTE e If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective A Turn Signal On message will appear in the EVIC if equipped and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pull
355. lve any warranty issues or related concerns IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 625 MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washingion D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved
356. ly upshifts through all forward gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris tics under all normal operating conditions To maximize fuel economy the Dual Dry Clutch auto matic transmission uses a geartrain arrangement similar to a manual transmission Therefore you should become familiar with some of the normal operational character istics of the DDCT e During low speed driving conditions in first gear vehicle momentum changes may feel exaggerated in response to changes in accelerator pedal position This behavior is normal and is similar to vehicles equipped with a manual transmission At low speeds you may hear mechanical noises similar to a manual transmission as the transmission changes gears These noises are normal and will not damage the transmission Very aggressive driving may result in some clutch odor similar to a manual transmission An active warning message will display in the Instrument Clus ter if cool down actions are needed When stopped on an incline always hold the vehicle in place using the brakes On steep inclines Hill Start Assist HSA will temporarily hold the car in position when the brake pedal is released If the accelerator pedal is not applied after a short time the car will roll back Either reapply the brake to hold the vehicle or press the accelerator to climb the hill Before and after the engine is started you may hear a hydraulic pump for a short period of time This
357. m Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR R at Doors u s ee x We OR 35 It Equipped xs ede ete ee ea 58 B KEYLESS ENTER N GO sa es asa Rd 36 Energy Management Feature 59 E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 59 Bi ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS 106 Belt Pretensioning And Load Limitation Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert llle Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Seat Belt Extender Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Event Data Recorder EDR Child Restraints see RE a B SAFETY TIPS 0 0000 107 Transporting Passengers cean cresen ranges 107 aS Exhaust GaSe s was ae dane aed ae 108 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle iva heck oa nies LES 109 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle 111 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or keyless ignition system The key start ignition system consists of a either a bladed key with an immobilizer chip in it or a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an Ignition Node Module IGNM The keyless ignition system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE t
358. main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE e Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581 Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types is not recom mended and can result in cooling system damage If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency have a authorized dealer drain flush and refill with OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 as soon as possible Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result
359. mall amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix Ge Air is directed through the floor defrost and side gt window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Front Defrost Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side win dow defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pressed This dehu midifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary 392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 6 Electronic Rear Window Defrost CAUTION Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indica tor in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes For an addi tional 15 minutes of operation press the button a second time Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a
360. memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo Delete All to delete all memos Setup To switch to system setup you may say one of the following Change to setup e Switch to system setup Main menu setup e Switch to setup In this mode you may say the following commands Language English Language French Language Spanish e Tutorial Voice Training ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command vRbutton first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the Voice Command Sve button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be re peated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M VOICE COMMAND WARNING Uconnect 8 4 8 4 Nav Any voic
361. mission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam aging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine ee STARTING AND OPERATING 437 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive sixth gear The transmission will automatically shift i
362. mmended 3 Temperature Control When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled e The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air weather will cause windows to fog on the inside inside the passenger compartment Rotating the dial left because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Se into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler tempera lect the outside air position for maximum defogging tures while rotating right into the red area indicates e The A C will engage automatically to prevent fog 2TImer temperatures ging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or Bi Level 390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance 4 Air Conditioning Control Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures
363. moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the car seat Next pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether 104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M strap Refer to Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a tether anchor 6 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the belt path opening of the child restraint you may have trouble tightening the seat belt If this happens discon nect the latch plate from
364. mpm a T Cu c 8ea014 Jart OWNER S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of acci dents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your per ceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of fea tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or im provements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufac tured Copyright 2013 Chrysler Group LLC e SECTION TABLE OF C
365. n 458 STARTING AND OPERATING ESC Off Indicator Light TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the Electronic Stability Control ESC is partially OFF of In some cases when accelerating from stop on steep grades it may be beneficial to turn off ESC Once the grade ascent is complete ESC can be turned on again 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety Standards 4 Maximum Load Code TIN 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades nn STARTING AND OPERATING 459 NOTE e e e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only Temporary high pressure com pact spare tires
366. n you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealer name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 423 6343 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 623 In Mexico Contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service o
367. n Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for cooler temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 11 Driver Temperature Control Up Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for warmer temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 12 Modes The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets demist outlets and defrost outlets The Mode settings are as follows e Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets e Bi Level Mode e Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and f oor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397 NOTE BI LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor o
368. n the tread of your vehicle Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses 526 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the TIREFIT kit Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1 4 6 mm or larger If the tire has any sidewall damage If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire If the wheel has any damage If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel Continued WARNING Continued Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat source e A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place provided Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to come in contact with hair eyes or clothing TIRE FIT is harmful if inhaled swallowed or absorbed through the skin It causes skin eye and respira tory irritation Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin Change clothing as soon as possible if there is
369. n touch the desired language soft key until a check mark appears next to the language showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Units When in this display you may select to have the EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped changed between US and Metric units of measure Touch US or Metric until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353 Voice Response Length When in this display you may change the Voice Re sponse Length settings To change the Voice Response Length touch the Brief or Detailed soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Touchscreen Beep When in this display you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touch screen button soft key is pressed Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster When this feature is selected the turn by turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route To make your selection touch the Navigation Turn By T
370. n will be grayed out and the feature will not be available for use 68 af FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 Messaging gt Inbox I 14 James Butler Listen EJ 13 248 576 5459 b 12 Beatrice Adams Inbox Listen Listen 11 Sanjiv Prabaker Listen fe 10 Lin Ford Listen E3 9 Jay Kay 7 items in list Y Radio Player Listen v r l ors Phone More D Nav OFF Controls Climate Voice Text List NOTE Uconnect Phone SMS is only available when the vehicle is not moving Read Messages If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message di FM 95 5 70 out Me lll be there soon Reply Forward Inbox o OFF Sy Ev Radio Player Controls Climate Voice Text Reply ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 Once a message is received and viewed or listened to t FM 95 5 70 out you will have the following options Messaging gt e Send a Reply inbox 1 Yes Now 2 No e Forward Message 3 Okay e Call 4 I can t talk right now 5 Call me Send Messages Using Soft Keys 6 I ll call you later bd 18 items in list 1 1 2 FT OFF NW ond Player Controls Climate Nav Phone More You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message 1 Touch the Phone soft key Preset Message List 4 If multiple numbers are availabl
371. na s 387 Uconnect 8 4 Climate Controls If EQUIP POs 0 ordures Opere beams ts 393 Climate Control Functions 398 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 399 Operating Tips 6 eee eee 400 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 040163952 1 Air Demister 5 Glove Compartment 9 Trunk Release 2 Outlet 6 Climate Control Hard Controls Uconnect System Hard Controls 10 Hood Release 3 Instrument Cluster 7 Power Outlet 11 Dimmer Control 4 Radio Uconnect System 8 Ignition Switch 12 Headlight Switch UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE 0403005422 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM ANALOG 12567 miles TRIPBINFO _ BRAKE _ EE NM 29 10 040369778 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 X INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM DIGITAL 85 F DODGYy DUI d FULL ED GAUGE N BRAKE i 040369779 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 2 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped i Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended b
372. nd shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Continued 5 If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance WARNING e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Continued e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are
373. nd are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires be aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold driving conditions For more information contact a au thorized dealer Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall Use summer tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter Snow tires can be identified by a mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall 474 STARTING AND OPERATING ME If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tir
374. nd call has established press and hold the w button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the but ton Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the w button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the w button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cancellation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call
375. nd the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears This transmission is programmed to prevent shifting from REVERSE to DRIVE or DRIVE to REVERSE if vehicle speed is above 6 mph 10 km h This safety feature helps protect your transmission from damage 420 STARTING AND OPERATING The transmission shift lever has PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL DRIVE and AutoStick shift positions Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section for further informa tion Moving the shift lever rearward or forward while in the AutoStick position beside the DRIVE position will manually select the transmission gear and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1 2 3 ete Shift Lever Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range ee STARTING AND OPERATING 421 NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK P This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may shift the transmission into PARK first and then ap
376. nd updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Add Names To Your Uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Other This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect amp Phone automati cally downloads your mobile phone s phonebook Edit Uconnect amp Phonebook Entries NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recomme
377. nded when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic down loaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e Press the w button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit Next choose the number designation home work mobile or other that you wish to edit ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the w button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say
378. ndles press the door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors 021864389 Trunk Unlock Button 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Do NOT grab the door handle when pressing the door handle lock button This could unlock the door s 020273033 Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking 020273032 Press The Door Handle Button To Lock NOTE e After pressing the door handle LOCK button you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using either Passive Entry door handle This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door control all the aS door windows Power Window Switches 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position NOTE For vehicles equipped with the UconnectG the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cy
379. nflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates are possible based on several factors including the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator Unit The Supplemental Knee Air Bag units are located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering column and below the glove compartment When the ORC detects a collision requiring the air bag it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental Knee Air Bags The Supplemental Knee Air Bag deploys down and around the knee blocker glove box surface allowin
380. ng Hitch A weight distributing hitch system works by applying leverage through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight ee STARTING AND OPERATING 505 to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s direc tions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control and thereby en hancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds contributing positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recom mended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with GAWR require ments Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Max Trailer Hitch In dustry Standards 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg Class Class I Light Duty Class II Me
381. nges or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Key Fob with Remote x2 Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 NOTE Battery at an acceptable charge level e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic e RKE panic button not pressed issi i ith R a A e System not disabled from previous remote start event a e Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may Vehicle theft slam notactive reduce this range How To Use Remote Start A i EE Posen All of the following conditions must be met before the WARNING engine will remote start e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or e Shift lever in PARK confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon e Doors closed oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause s
382. ns can cause damage to the heating elements Continued CAUTION Continued e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 6 Passenger Temperature Control Up Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for warmer temperature set tings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss 7 Passenger Temperature Control Down Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for cooler temperature settings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 8 Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON OFF 9 AUTO Operation Button Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes Refer to Automatic Operation for more information 10 Driver Temperature Control Dow
383. nspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 17 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 18 Fuel Door Reminder The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the vehicle 19 Electronic Speed Control Set Light pr This light will turn on when the electronic speed control has been set 20 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 21 Park Headlight ON Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on 00 22 Odometer Display Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or
384. nterference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not ex pressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci fications were met POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console 033365526 Power Sunroof Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283 WARNING Continued Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof WARNING e Never leave children unattended in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode Occupants particu larly unattended children can become entrapped Press the switch rearward and release it within one half by the power sunroof while operating the power second The sunroof and sunshade will open automati sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in cally from any position The sunroof and sunshade will serious injury or death open fully and stop automatic
385. nto Overdrive if the following con ditions are present e The shift lever is in the DRIVE position e The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem perature e The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera ture Vehicle speed is sufficiently high e The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations the clutch automatically disengages 438 STARTING AND OPERATING Ses NOTE Engagement of the torque converter clutch is inhibited at very cold temperatures Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal The torque converter clutch will function normally once the trans mission is sufficiently warm AUTOSTICK amp AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control giving you more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize en gine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and down shifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with mor
386. o a clutch transmission or driveline component Damage to the drivetrain could result Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re quirements can cause severe transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered un der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1 4L TURBO 557 B MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 563 ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 0L 558 Engine Oll cler mb Beh aoe ee 564 ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 4L 559 Engine Oil Filter 0 ee 567 ll ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II 560 Engine Air Cleaner Filter sius Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 560 Tit S C ll EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND Maintenance Free Battery MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS 561 Air Conditioner Maintenance Bl REPLACEMENT PARTS 00 562 AIC OA Rib es dons wel aateca tn Leu 57 B DEALER SERVICE 0000000 563 B ody bieh s ssec eL e mies a 573 Windshield Wiper Blades 573 556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Adding Washer Fluid 5 4 W VEHICLE STORAGE 44034044044 Ri 601 Exhaust System 0 00 e nitk 575 NM REPLACEMENT BULBS s0ss400s arcsned 602 Cooling System isses sse cena 577 W B
387. o these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate 628 Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire l
388. ocked vehicle e Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses a Key or Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter an RF receiver and either an Ignition Node Module IGNM or a Keyless Ignition Node KIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Keys or Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and oper
389. of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press Grab The Door Handle To Unlock Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed Hensimtter be elude all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a driver s door handle To select between Unlock Driver Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press refer to Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch ment Panel for further information is in the OFF position 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out side the vehicle the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle NOT
390. ogramming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Replacement BS The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may ap ply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 1 If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw remove the screw With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during removal 2 Remove and replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves of the case together Make sure there is an even gap between the two halves If equipped install and tighten the screw until snug Test RKE transmitter operation General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration NOTE Cha
391. ol of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 057003767 508 STARTING AND OPERATING Ses Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle The tongue weight of the trailer The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information Placard in Tire Safety Information for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your ve hicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads ee STARTING AND OPERATING 509 WARNING Continu
392. on a lift Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic A E d Jack Warning Label CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 537 0605020333 0616013740 mm Jacking Locations Removing Jack Handle From Jack 1 Remove the spare tire jack and wheel bolt wrench 2 If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center NOTE The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack cap covers the wheel bolts use the wheel bolt wrench with two attachment points When the jack is partially 3o ir Ue COMME cap aM Carei Perote raisitg ihe expanded the tension between the two attachment SEE points holds the jack handle in place 538 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3 Before raising the vehicle use the wheel bolt wrench to loosen but not remove the wheel bolts on the wheel with the flat tire Turn the wheel bolts counter clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 4 Place the jack underneath the notched lift area that is closest to the flat tire Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange centering the jack saddle between the locating notches on the sill flange 0605015784 Front Jacking Loc
393. on results in an increase of 2 km h Metric Speed kmlh If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established e Pressing the SET button once will result in a 2 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 2 km h ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255 e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then the new set speed will be established To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The
394. onditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected the exterior lights will flash the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times and the exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering Security System Manual Override The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger ILLUMINATED ENTRY The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position from the OFF position 24 THINGS TO K
395. one menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts There are two general meth ods for how Voice Command works 1 Say compound commands like Call John Smith mo bile 2 Say the individual commands and allow the system to guide you to complete the task You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Listen prompt or another prompt For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Call and then ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 John Smith and then mobile the following com pound command can be said Call John Smith mo bile For each feature explanation in this section only the compound command form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound command form voice command Search for John Smith or you can break the compound command form into two voice commands Search Contact and when asked John Smith Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Natural Speech Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language Voice Recognition
396. oning properly The Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the PARK ASSIST SYSTEM DISABLED message If PARK ASSIST SYSTEM DISABLED appears in the EVIC cycle the ignition If the message appears again see an authorized dealer AM 760 WJR hs b F3 P Park Assist System DEF Le re 990 Park Assist System Disabled Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense amp System Usage Precautions NOTE e Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the rear bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction to keep the ParkSense system operating properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense e When you turn ParkSense off the EVIC will display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFE Furthermore once you UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267 turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Clean the ParkSense sensors regularl
397. onitors for motion in the vehicle If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals the horn will pulse the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after three minutes turn all of the visual signals off after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition system refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the key is physically removed from the ignition 2 Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle e Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and or passenger door open 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone refer to Keyless Enter N Go V in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for fur
398. ools to add cool ant properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer Selection Of Coolant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579 CAUTION CAUTION Continued Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than Bo not use water alone Ur alcokolsbasee M cae specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not damage and may decrease corrosion protection be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool ant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en gine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling Adding Coolant system in an emergency the cooling system will need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 by an coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 that authorized dealer as soon as possible allows extended maintenance intervals This engine cool ant antifr
399. operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK Manual Transmission Vehicles The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any gear and enters stand by mode when the Park Brake is engaged the vehicle is not in REVERSE and the vehicle is stationary ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 030440174 BSM Warning Light The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft or 3 8 m The zone starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap proximately 23 ft 7 m to the rear of the vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph 10 km h or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas NOTE The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de tection zones The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer Therefore visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change If the trailer or other object i e bicycle sports equipment extends beyond the side of your vehicle this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of
400. or Refer to the following illustrations 1 Female Pins E 057003766 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn 7 ON 9 o0 o 604 149 lo dor ge NL LOT 49 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic STARTING AND OPERATING 513 Manual Transmission If Equipped If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage Automatic Transmission If Equipped The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE use the AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower gear NOTE Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat buildup This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation then change the trans mission fluid and filter as specified for severe usage 514 STARTING AND OPERATING Se police fleet taxi or frequent trailer towing Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance in tervals AutoStick When usin
401. or prolonged period on dry pave ment CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions Continued Continued 482 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Continued These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires a The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with Observe the traction device manufacturer s instruc aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tions on the method of installation operating tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain speed and conditions for use Always use the mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a suggested operating speed of the device manufac smooth quiet ride turer s if it is less than 30 mph 48 km h e Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates The suggested rotation method is the rearward cross shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed E ES E S 055707139 Tire Rotation
402. or service without damaging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 430 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Six Speed Automatic Transmission 2 0L And 2 4L Engine Only 6F24 The transmission gear position display located in the instrument panel cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal and the lock button on the shift lever to move the shift lever out of PARK refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock Sys tem in this section To drive press the lock button on the front of the shift lever and move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore
403. or to change flash follow these steps rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you are programming 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light 280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian Gate Operator Programming step 2 and follow all remaining steps Using HomeLink amp To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the programmed device i e garage door opener gate opera tor security system entry door lock home office light ing etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions Replace the battery
404. ore continuing 1 Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to the Air Mode position 2 Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 531 3 Uncoil the Air Pump Hose 7 black in color and screw the fitting at the end of hose 7 onto the valve stem 4 Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge 3 If tire pressure is less than 19 psi 1 3 Bar The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance If the tire pressure is 19 psi 1 3 Bar or higher 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn on TIREFIT and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver side door opening NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated press the Defla tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing 2 Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet 3 Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle 4 Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire service center 5 Replace the Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos sible Refer to F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace ment NOTE When having the tire serviced advis
405. ore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the Eve button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve A Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the w button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the e but ton until you hear a single beep 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the button until you hear a single beep indicat ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the e button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Eve button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the seco
406. orm of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and MOPAR Carpet Cleaner or equivalent for carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth or MOPAR Satin Select or equivalent Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593 WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch r
407. osing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567 station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Ai
408. ossible If the telltale is flashing when the engine is running imme diate service is required You may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing Engine Temperature Warning Telltale _ This telltale warns of an overheated engine con dition As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this telltale will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold e If the telltale turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information e Electric Power Steering Malfunction el This telltale is on when the Electric Power Steering is not operating and needs service 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EVIC White Telltales e Electronic Speed Control ON This telltale will illuminate amber when the O electronic speed control is ON For further information refer to Electronic Speed Con trol in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle EVIC Green Telltales e Electronic Speed Control SET This telltale will illuminate green when the electronic speed control is SET For further information refer to Electronic Spee
409. ot for approximately 1 5 seconds the warning stationary objects such as guardrails posts walls foliage light will be illuminated If the difference in speed 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE berms etc However occasionally the system may alert on such objects This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service Stationary Objects Overtaking Passing The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 WARNING The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians bicy clists or animals Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system always check your vehicle s mirrors glance over your shoulder and use your turn signal before changing lanes Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Opposing Traffic 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Cross Path The Rear Cross Path RCP feature is intended to aid the drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected alert the driver
410. outboard side of the seat heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push downward on the lever to lower the seat height gt The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated using the Uconnect System WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time 030964924 Continued Seat Height Adjustment ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 5 Front Heated Seat Operations Vehicles MAIN AEO Equipped With Uconnect 8 4 and 8 4N Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion Press the Controls soft key located on the Uconnect This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting display in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface tempera ture of the seat NI TA OFF Player Controls Climate E More Controls Soft Key 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Press the Driver or Passenger seat soft key ay once to select HI level heating Press the soft key a second time to select LO level heating Press the soft key a th
411. p the key fob in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you obtain service Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied To shift the transmission out of PARK the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 419 Six Speed Automatic Transmission 1 4L Turbo Engine Only DDCT The transmission gear position display located in the instrument panel cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal and the lock button on the shift lever to move the shift lever out of PARK refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock Sys tem in this section To drive press the lock button on the front of the shift lever and move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released a
412. peed if too low of a gear is selected and the clutch pedal is released Damage to the clutch and the transmission can result from skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is held pressed i e not released Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed e Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 417 WARNING WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob and lock your vehicle Continued Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to
413. perator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French 624 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to reso
414. performance may be compromised with the convertible top down ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 Far End Audio Performance e e e e e e e e e Audio quality is maximized under Low To Medium Blower Setting Low To Medium Vehicle Speed Low Road Noise Smooth Road Surface Fully Closed Windows Dry Weather Conditions Operation From The Driver s Seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect amp Phone Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e Ina convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030772523 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 Voice Tree Phonebook phonebook List Names Entries Listed one Enter Location Entry Deleted 1st Confirmation 2nd Confirmation Enter Name Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played
415. plosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK manual transmission in NEUTRAL and battery explosion turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result Jump Starting Procedure WARNING Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 547 CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle Connecting The Jumper Cables 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the positive post of the discharged vehicle Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery and the fuel inject
416. ply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi cult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if itis not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued 422 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before
417. pped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity E STARTING AND OPERATING 477 WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side B Pillar or
418. propriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Most of the messages of this type are then stored as long as the condition that activated it remains active and can be reviewed from the Messages main menu item As long as there is a stored message an i will be displayed in the EVIC s compass outside temp line Examples of this message type are Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out and Low Tire Pressure e Unstored Messages This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared Examples of this message type are Turn Signal On if a turn signal is left on and Lights On if driver leaves the vehicle e Unstored Messages Until RUN These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state Examples of this message type are Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar and Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start e Five Second Unstored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen An example of this message type is Automatic High Beams On es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
419. r axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either the front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certi fication Label in Starting and Operating for further information 504 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributi
420. r shift selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed Starting with the ignition in the OFF position once the EVIC if equipped will display a Vehicle press the ENGINE START STOP button once to place Not In Park message and the engine will remain joris a ap as th tion to the ACC tion EVIC will displ running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK ACC MS pomoni EE position or it could roll 1 Place the shift lever shift selector in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 410 STARTING AND OPERATING Se e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a second time Extended Park Starting to place the ignition to the RUN position EVIC will display ON RUN Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time to return the ignition to the OFF position EVIC will display OFF Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting under extreme cold conditions an externally powered electric block heater available from your authorized dealer is required for the 1 4L Turbo engine below 20 F 29 C and for the 2 4L engine below 29 F 34 C and is recommended for the 2 0L engine and 2 4L engine below 20 F 29 C 4 If the engine fails to start after 8 attempts allow the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes then repeat the procedure NOTE Extended Park condition occurs when the v
421. r Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom mended 568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Tires WARNING Checking For Tire Wear E 0 Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can Once a month check the tire inflation pressures and look burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid for unusual wear or damage Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme Maintenance Free Battery diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other e Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
422. ransmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node KIN Ignition Node Module IGNM If Equipped The Ignition Node Module IGNM operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three with detents and one that is spring loaded The detent posi tions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automati cally returns to the ON RUN position NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display the ignition switch position OFF ACC RUN Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Wireless Ignition Node WIN 1 OFF 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN 4 START THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Keyless Ignition Node KIN If Equipped This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment The Keyless Ignition Node KIN has four operating positions three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position The three positions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The fourth position is START during start RUN will illuminate 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE In case the ignition
423. ravel since the last reset Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the ON RUN position Resetting A Trip Info Function To Reset any of the three Trip Info functions select the function you want to reset using the UP or DOWN buttons Press the RIGHT arrow button until the feature displays zero Stored Messages Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow A button until the Messages display icon is high lighted in the EVIC This feature shows the number of stored warning messages Pressing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the stored messages are Press the LEFT arrow button to return to the Main Menu 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Screen Setup Screen Setup Display Analog Icon eoe Screen Setup Display Digital Icon Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Screen Setup display icon is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to enter the Screen Setup sub menu The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Screen Setup display icon is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to enter the Screen Setup sub menu The Screen Setup feature allows you to change the location that information is displayed within the instrument cluster Use the UP and DOWN buttons to
424. remove the Key controls or move the vehicle Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Manual Transmission If Equipped e Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake dangerous for a number of reasons A child or press the clutch pedal to the floor and place the shift others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil lever in NEUTRAL dren should be warned not to touch the parking NOTE brake brake pedal or the shift lever The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is Continued pressed to the floor 408 STARTING AND OPERATING Se If the key will not turn and the steering wheel is locked rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve pressure on the locking mechanism and then turn the key Automatic Transmission If Equipped The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine Depress the brake pedal before shifting to any driving gear NOTE You must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows the driver to oper ate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment Normal Starting Using The ENGINE START STOP Button 1 The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL
425. rer s in structions for cleaning Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC system serviced as well Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air bags will not be in place to protect you 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued WARNING Continued Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system serv
426. result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system See your local authorized dealer for service Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585 WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued WARNING Continued To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro longed braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continue
427. rference that may cause undesired op eration Uconnect amp Phone 8 4 8 4N Uconneci 8 4 8 4Nav Uconnect amp Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone Uconnect Phone supports the following features Voice Activated Features e Hands Free dialing via Voice Call John Smith Mo bile or Dial 248 555 1212 e Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming SMS messages e Hands Free text messaging Send a message to John Smith Mobile Redialing last dialed numbers Redial 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Calling Back the last incoming call number Call Back e View Call logs on screen Show incoming calls Show Outgoing calls Show missed Calls Show Recent Calls Searching Contacts phone number Search for John Smith Mobile Screen Activated Features e Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen e Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis played on the touchscreen e Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen e Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS e Sending a text message via the touchscreen e Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the touchscreen Pairing up to 10 phones audio devices for easy access
428. rily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup ry It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 WARNING Occupant Classification Module OCM located in the front passenger seat Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags e OCS Sensor located in the front passenger seat E to protect you in a collision If the light does notcome e Air Bag Warning Light on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the passenger Advanced Front Air Bag The OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the sensors estimate that Occupant Classification System OCS The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very Front Passenger Seat light objects in it or The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for iis veide The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas senger including a child or The Occupant Classification System OCS consists of the following
429. rn the key to the RUN position 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door rotate the door lock knob on each door trim panel forward To unlock the front doors pull the inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door lock button until the red indicator is visible To unlock the rear doors rotate the door lock button until the red indicator is visible Door Lock Knob If the door lock button is locked no red indicator visible when you shut the door the door will lock Therefore make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is on each front door trim For personal security and safety in the event of an panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors collision lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC
430. ront Seat Adjustment While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar and move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once you have reached the desired position Then using body pressure Power Lumbar Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Recline Lever Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment WARNING To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the outboard side of the seat lean back to the desired shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest position and release the lever To return the seatback lift In a collision you could slide under the seat belt the lever lean forward and release the lever which could result in serious injury or death 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SS Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped Heated Seats If Equipped The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by On some models the front seats may be equipped with using a lever located on the
431. rting Procedures 00000000 407 Steering Column Controls llle 238 Column HOEK auae d os GP ae EEO eS 248 TM Columbia FR wea Gein als Row d arbos alee RARE US 248 ee INDEX 645 Wheel Heated 0 00 0 eee eee 249 Wheel Tilt e aieka eaa a boa ees a Ea FI a 248 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 385 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 385 SLOTape 4 ess Exe eges ENS Ea BENE e as 601 Storage Vehicle ass sso osa her Red 401 Stuck Freeing ii seg ia Re PR 548 Sunglasses Storage eee ee 272 S n ROGE a 04 eee eet eye gad oye Cheha aes 282 Sun Visor Extension eco ciero currissini 123 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 61 Sway Control Trailer 2 2 0 0 0 0 00005 451 System Remote Starting 0004 28 Tachometer ose Re eee RE 308 Telescoping Steering Column issue 248 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 399 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 310 Text Messaging a sede ere OR e ba a 161 Tilt Steering Column s cesa sae aea a aaae 248 Time Delay Headlight 205 235 Tire and Loading Information Placard 464 TIRER 22e abend E bee eed eases Tire Markinps s s 6e ee eter eto wae bee SP Tire ROLAHOTE 1092 arate RR RR drug RERO RUE de ds Aging Life of Tires llle Air Pressure Chains bbc ea exa CE RR Pa Changlng s 44 cache mene sews ede eae duos Compact Spare Gener
432. ry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch on the face of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand Emergency Key Removal IGNM 020207467 0202005283 Emergency Key Removal KIN NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Ignition Or Accessory On Message Opening the driver s door when the ignition is in ACC or ON engine not running a chime will sound to remind you to place the ignition in the OFF position In addition to the chime the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster NOTE With the Uconnect system the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unl
433. s llle 122 Heated Seats 0 2 0 00 cee eee 224 Heaters ensa Ge eR ESSAI ward ewig ad bee ake 388 Heater Engine Block odore d ae tees 412 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 240 Hill Start Assist llli ier eigd 452 Hitches Trailer Towing 24 0044 ER hoe Rees 505 Holder Coin vas or ree 291 HomeLink Garage Door Opener 273 Ignition Key evi end Ss E X oaen E E REG EUR Illuminated Entry illl Immobilizer Sentry Key 00 4 Infant Restraint 4 2 54 us he UR eed bond Information Center Vehicle 0 Inside Rearview Mirror llle ess Instrument Cluster llle eee ee Instrument Panel and Controls 638 INDEX ees Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 594 Interior Appearance Care sas nasara kiat sss 592 Interior Lights irespeto e rere 241 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 244 Introduction 4c oe ee RYE CER RE d 4 iPod USB MP3 Control Bluetooth Streaming Audio 171 Jacking Instructions 0 0 0 eee eee 535 Jack Location lille 533 Jack Operation llle 532 Jump Starting cllc 544 Key In Reminder llle 17 Keyless Enter N Go 000000000004 36 Keyless Entry System 2 0 srra ee eee eae 24 Keyless GO isin saniem a inna Cala aie oe une 15 Key Programming ssc 2 40 os escasas e 20 Key Replacement iure ea tae aed x 20 Keys ied ee
434. s seat belt Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger who have out grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Vehicle Seat Belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rearward facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag A deploying Passeng
435. s Interior Lights 243 Daytime Running Lights esa scac oeae semea 237 Dealer Service 6 eee 563 Deck Lid Emergency Release 0 46 Deck Lid Power Release 0 000005 45 Defroster Rear Window lesen 299 Defroster Windshield llle 109 Delay Intermittent Wipers 00 244 Diagnostic System Onboard 560 Dimmer Switch Headlight 240 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission 587 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 582 Door Locks 0 00 eee 32 Door Locks Automatic 0 0 00000000 34 Door Opener Garage 6 6 5 0 0 0 00000000 273 Driver s Seat Back Tilt 2 0 2 0 0 0 00 000008 223 634 INDEX ee Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Waters eid genie deu eed be eae dd 441 Electrical Power Outlets l l 286 Electric Rear Window Defrost 299 Electric Remote Mirrors lesse 122 Electronic Brake Control System LL 446 Brake Assist System eese 449 Electronic Stability Program 455 Traction Control System 00005 450 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 450 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 251 Electronic Stability Program ESP 455 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 269 Emergency Brake 2 00 0 442 Emergency Deck
436. s 6 8 Liters Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE eae NNNM FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPARG Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology or equivalent meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 Engine Oil 1 4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use SAE 5W 40 API Certified Synthetic Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12991 such as MOPAR Pennzoil and Shell Helix Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 2 0L and 2 4L Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W 20 API Certified Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 such as MOPAR Pennzoil and Shell Helix amp Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609 Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Spark Plugs 1 4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Gap 0 026 in 0 65 mm Spark Plugs 2 0L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Spark Plugs
437. s Enter N Go 0005 408 Normal Starting 0 0 0 000 00 408 Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C 0 2 e ee eee 410 O Extended Park Starting 410 If Engine Fails To Start 411 After Starting cosa ae cee ned Rd 411 Turbocharger Cool Down If Equipped ll ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED ll MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED SMUG gedhi ereas nee a eee a daa Downshifting ll AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED O Key Ignition Park Interlock Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System All 412 414 416 418 418 404 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Six Speed Automatic Transmission 1 4L Turbo Engine Only DDCT 419 Six Speed Automatic Transmission 2 0L And 2 4L Engine Only 6F24 430 la AUTOSTICK 0 2 case gadencae RR eee 438 Operations i442 ed e bu de dia oe pa dd d nd 438 ll DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES 440 Acceleration 5 eaa RR ante exar 440 Iracti n sme eR ERR LAU PEERS 440 ll DRIVING THROUGH WATER 441 Flowing Rising Water 6 441 Shallow Standing Water lisse 441 M PARKING BRAKE ssssseee eee 442 B POWER STEERING 0 000004 445 E
438. s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine NOTE If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 2 As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
439. s above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Tire Repair If your tire becomes damaged it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria e The tire has not been driven on when flat e The damage is only on the tread section of your tire sidewall damage is not repairable e The puncture is no greater than 1 4 6 mm ee STARTING AND OPERATING 473 Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information Damaged Run Flat tires or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description Load Index and Speed Code Tire Types All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons spring summer fall and winter Traction levels may vary be tween different all season tires All season tires can be identified by the M S M amp S M S or MS designation on the tire sidewall Use all season tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions a
440. s allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors including the severity and type of collision Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 WARNING e Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rearward facing infant seat Only use a rearward facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 2 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should always wear their lap a
441. s been reached Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached 0309020320 Power Seat Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward WARNING The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward i Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward the Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seatback will move in the direction of the switch Release Shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest the switch when the desired position has been reached 1 a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death 0309020319 Power Seat Recliner Switch 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Power Lumbar If Equipped Manual Front Seat Forward Rearward Adjustment Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats On models equipped with manual seats the adjusting may be also be equipped with power lumbar The power par is located at the front of the seats near the floor lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support F
442. s mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors When Lights amp Chime mode is activated the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deacti vated To change the Blind Spot Alert status touch the Off Lights or Lights amp Chime soft key Then touch the back arrow soft key NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification e ParkView Backup Camera Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will 356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate To make your selection touch the ParkView Backup Camera soft ke
443. s ot SECRET SERE 316 Oil Change Indicator llis 317 Oil Change Indicator Reset sess 317 Oil Engin said uos Set eter tamed ones v Ed 564 Capacity a5 se neraber ree ca tee Pra d 607 Change Intervals ass rusaet aueia Ceasa 565 Checking i dise ed na hs oa eade ea 564 Disposal ace sbrved eme ee TE be AER 566 Fite sub cse meme nk REESE EET 567 Filter Disposal e RR ERR ees 566 Materials Added to sises si earisses esras si 566 Recommendation 0 00000 e eee 565 VISCOSILY iier ee Pole wedir Pac ee 566 Oil Filter Selection llle 567 Onboard Diagnostic Systems cs sss croeer enics 560 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 273 Operating Precautions ecese res llle 560 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors 00 120 Overhead Console llle 271 Overheating Engine es senis Ceea ia eiea 310 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 PaintCare iie sdr obiit nst e edes 588 Panic Alatmr 2o eR RE ERG men ves 26 Parking Drake iu os sea t ere Rene igna 442 Parking On Hill 6 6 eee 442 ParkSense System Rear 00000 255 Passing Fight c ex eee we Ras oes PtSi teeta ES SPEM Sh SS Sa Ha eee oy ea Phone Cellular 642 INDEX ae Phone Hands Free Uconnect 133 Phone Pairing cea guise ei creer eee es 170 Placard Tire and Loading Information 465 Power Deck Lid Release
444. se blows again contact an autho rized dealer e If a general protection fuse for safety systems air bag system braking system power unit systems engine system gearbox system or steering system blows contact an authorized dealer Interior Fuses The interior fuses are located on the drivers side under the instrument panel Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse F1 20 Amp Front Heated Seats Yellow If Equipped F2 20 Amp Rear Heated Seats Yellow Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped F3 10 Amp Park Assist Mod Red ule Rear Camera Left and Right Blind Spot Sensor Compass If Equipped 596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse FA 15 Amp Instrument Cluster F21 10 Amp Diagnostic Port Blue Red F5 10 Amp HVAC Humidity F22 10 Amp Universal Garage Red Sensor In Car Red Door Opener EOM Temperature Sen F23 20 Amp Sunroof sor Inside Mirror Yellow Assembly F24 5 Amp Run Accessory F18 15 Amp Radio Tan Relay Ping F25 5 Amp Transmission Con F19 10 Amp Fuel Door Tan trol Module 4 ped F26 5 Amp Stop Lamp Switch F20 10 Amp Steering Column Tan Red j Conio Module F27 10 Amp Pneumatic Lumbar Switch Bank Red Support MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597
445. seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Headlights With Wipers If Equipped When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on ap proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection touch the Headlights With Wipers soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto Dim High Beams SmartBeam If Equipped When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection touch the Auto High Beams soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Daytime Running Lights When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make your selection touch the Daytime Running Lights
446. service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the EVIC display It displays the gear position of the auto matic transmission NOTE You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 instrument cluster For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 23 Charging System Warning Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should turn on when the ignition switch is first placed in ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or turns on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices i e radio or slightly increase engine speed if at idle If the light remains on it means that the charging system is experiencing a problem See your local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately If jump
447. settings or phone mute off set up new entry towing assistance no transfer call other Uconnect Tutorial pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 Voice Text Reply Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Read Messages If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect Phone and your phone is sup ported an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message If you wish to hear the new message e Press the w button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Read or Read Messages Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for you After reading a message you can Reply or Forward the message using Uconnect Phone Send Messages You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message e Press the button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say 3 SMS Send or Send Message You can either say the message you wish to send or say List Messages There are 20 preset messages To send a message press the amp vRbutton while the system is listing the message and say Send Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the name or number of the person you wish to send the message to List of Preset Messages 1 Yes 2 No 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YO
448. sible lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint Tether Strap Mounting 1 Cover A Tether Strap Hook 3 Attaching Strap B Tether Anchor 4 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram 106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap e If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or
449. snow ice and dirt road 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE contamination so that the BSM system can function properly Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects bum per stickers bicycle racks etc The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible chime alert and reducing the radio volume Refer to Modes Of Operation for further information The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points side rear front while driving to see if an alert is necessary The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries Entering From The Side Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle Side Monitoring Entering From The Rear Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph 48 km h UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph 24 km h the warning light will not illuminate Rear Monitoring Overtaking Traffic If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed eae ADDIGACMME of less than 15 mph 24 km h and the vehicle remains in The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on the blind sp
450. soft key until a check mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting indicating that the setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Show Time In Status Bar If Equipped When in this display you may turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar To change the Show Time Status setting touch the Show Time in Status Bar soft key until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Safety Assistance After pressing the Safety Assistance soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Park Assist The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF To change the Park Assist status touch and release the OFF Sound Only or Sounds and Display button Then touch the back arrow soft key Refer to ParkSense Rear Park Assist in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for sys tem function and operating information e Blind Spot Alert When this feature is selected the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off Lights or Lights and Chime The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode When thi
451. sory On Message 17 Security System Manual Override 23 SENTRY REY s cxdvae es dewey kee PEOR dO n 19 M ILLUMINATED ENTRY 353 x4 EX eee 23 Replacement Keys llle 20 BM REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE ss 24 O Customer Key Programming 20 d To Unlock The Doors 06 25 General Information llle 20 To Lock The Doors 0 2 2 0000200 26 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To Unlatch The Trunk 000 26 M WINDOWS seen 41 Using The Panic Alarm 26 Power Windows es sanese soat iongu niesen 41 Programming Additional Transmitters 27 Wind Buffeting ss ce deine ad ceed 45 Transmitter Battery Replacement 27 WM TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE 5 53 45 General Information s sieca diiseni a ne Eis 28 BM TRUNK SAFETY WARNING eene 46 ll REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED 28 Trunk Emergency Release 46 How To Use Remote Start 0 29 M OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS iier ni 47 DOOR LOCKS i4 6L6REe 3 diteri E Ee Ia 32 Lap Shoulder Belts ss ecos pitido re dites 51 Manual Door Locks sesa roa apata kie e 32 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 56 Power Door Locks aer ees 33 Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 57 Child Protection Door Lock Syste
452. splay the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this dis play e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension 374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre Specification qu
453. stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269 WARNING Continued the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the touchscreen display along with a cau e Before using ParkSenseG it is strongly recom tion note to check entire surroundings across the top of mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem the screen After five seconds this note will disappear bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can vehicle above the rear License plate mm result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker Camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors appears again could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem When displayed static grid lines will illustrate the width bly depending on its size and shape giving a false ofthe vehicle and will show separate zones that will help indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle indicate the distance to the sar of the vehicle The following table shows the approximate distances for each P
454. sure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value ee STARTING AND OPERATING 485 CAUTION CAUTION Continued e The TPMS has been optimized for the original After inspecting or adjusting the tire pr equipment tires and wheels T
455. switch does not change with the push of a button the RKE transmitter Key Fob may have a low or dead battery In this situation a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch Put the nose side side opposite of the emergency key of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START STOP button and IB START push to operate the ignition switch eS ENGINE 020236152 Keyless Ignition Node KIN 1 OFF 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Keyless Enter N Go Feature If your vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature refer to Starting Procedure in Starting And Operating for further information Standard Blade Ignition Key If Equipped Your vehicle may use a standard blade key ignition system The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them ina safe place You can insert the double sided standard blade key into the ignition switch or lock cylinders with either side up Standard Blade Ignition Key 020265786 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Key Fob If Equipped The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for ent
456. t facing forward in the center of the seat with position your feet comfortably on or near the floor Do not carry or hold any objects e g backpacks boxes etc The front passenger carries or holds an object while while seated in the front passenger seat Holding an seated e g backpack box etc object may cause the OCS to not classify the passen ger s weight accurately which may result in serious injury or death in a collision en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 022665796 Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es AS AX 022665798 022665799 Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 WARNING Placing an object on the floor under the front pas senger seat may prevent the OCS from working properly which may result in serious injury or death in a collision Do not place any objects on the floor under the front passenger The Air Bag Warning Light amp will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat status A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of the air bag system 022665973 Not Seated Properly If the Air Bag Warning Light amp does not come on or stays on after you start the vehicle or it comes on as you drive take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service immediately 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
457. t under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Continued ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 533 WARNING Continued e Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access cover in the trunk Follow these steps to access the jack and spare tire 1 Open the trunk 2 Lift the access cover using the pull strap Pull Strap 0605012042 mm 534 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3 Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire 5 Remove the spare tire f WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery Jack Location areas 4 Remove the scissors jack and wheel bolt wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench and remove the wrench
458. t the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer sys tem serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Keys or Key Fobs with RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau thorized operation This system may also incorporate a ultrasonic intrusion sensor that m
459. te for proper tire mainte Module nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale and to maintain the proper pressure Light The TPMS consists of the following components e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Receiver Module Base System Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings Tius the rs Naming mncivator located nthe rhe Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi instrument cluster nate in the instrument cluster a LOW TIRE PRESSURE ee STARTING AND OPERATING 487 message and Inflate Tire to XX message will be dis played for a minimum of five seconds and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The recommended cold placard pressure value is the pressure value in the Inflate Tire to XX message
460. tempt to open them manually You may damage Occupant Classification System OCS the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC only when the air bags are inflating The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as which may receive information from the front impact Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in sensors any way n Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc impact that requires air bag deployment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact The SAB is marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front and rear seats if equipped with rear seat SAB When the air bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s back trim cover front seats or between the top and side s
461. th Remote Start cause the steering wheel heater to overheat On models that are equipped with remote start the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the In right side of the steering wheel i CANCEL 032209541 Electronic Speed Control Buttons 1 ON OFF 3 SET 2 RES 4 CANCEL 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button to activate the Electronic Speed Control The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or caus
462. the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Unlatch The Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 headlights will turn on the park lights and turn signals will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters Pr
463. the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt up to three full turns to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out away from the child restraint Repeat steps 4 to 6 above to complete the installation of the child restraint If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the buckle disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around one half turn and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint installation tight try a different seating position Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage 77 1 Look behind the seating position where you Hi plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105 2 Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint 3 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and where possible route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts If not pos
464. the rear edge of the driver s side door Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 478 STARTING AND OPERATING Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Refer to Replacement Tires in this section for further infor mation Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced e Dri
465. the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings A C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro sion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 OAT Organic Additive Technology coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401 Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost
466. ther information Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter 3 If any doors are open close them To Disarm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods e Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if equipped refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go press the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position NOTE The driver s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during power liftgate entry Pressing the liftgate button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door the alarm will sound When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create c
467. thin that source is initiated 3 The REPEAT button is toggled OFF This will only appear in the menu if the device currently playing can support these features Audio Selecting the Audio sub menu will allow you to adjust the Bass Mid Range Treble Balance or Fade just like pressing the Audio hard control If the BACK button is pressed the radio will return to the Main Menu Clock Selecting Clock will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the ENTER BROWSE button to set the minutes The min utes will highlight Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the ENTER BROWSE button to save time change 370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss System Info e Selecting System Info will display the software ver sion serial number and SIRIUS ID RADIO Button Press the button to select either AM FM and Satellite mode if equipped Buttons 1 5 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory AM A B C FM A B C and Satellite 15 AM 15 FM and 15 SAT stations To Set The Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press and hold the button 1 5 you wish to lock onto this station for three seconds You may add a second or third station to each pushbut ton by repeating the above procedure with this exception
468. til a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn With Lock When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359 touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry
469. ting showing that setting has been se lected Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or press the X soft key to close out of the settings screen Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft keys on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings Display After pressing the Display soft key the following settings will be available 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Display Mode When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings To change Mode status touch and release the Day Night or Auto soft key Then touch the back arrow soft key e Display Brightness With Headlights ON When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights on Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the back arrow soft key e Display Brightness With Headlights OFF When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the back arrow soft key e Set Language When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Touch the Set Language soft key and the
470. to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas senger temperature hard or soft control buttons 7 8 13 14 Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experi ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible 400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Uconnect System Settings in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode Manual Operation Override The system allows for manual selection of blower speed air distribution mode A C status and recirculation con trol The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in
471. tomatic High Beam Headlamp Control If Equipped The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automat ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view NOTE e Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control mirror is replaced the mirror must be re aimed to ensure proper performance See your local authorized dealer ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 To Activate 1 Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position 2 Push the multifunction lever away from you toward front of vehicle to engage the high beam mode NOTE This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 15 mph 35 km h To Deactivate 1 Pull the multifunction lever toward you or rearward in car to manu
472. ton and say Se lect or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to Select or Delete a paired phone Select Another Mobile Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone e Press the w button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect amp Phone Paired Mobile Phones e Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts You can also press the Sve button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the Xe button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizin
473. tor in the button will illuminate and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the when the rear window defroster is on The rear window heating elements Labels can be peeled off after defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 soaking with warm water minutes For an additional 15 minutes of operation press e Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive the button a second time window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS E INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 304 E INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE 305 E INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM ANALOGS ing sadcsiiquutea docto eae d 306 lil INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM DIGMAL os ig accu dede ege t errato d 307 ll INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 308 E ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC ose otioso ans aries dedgea tutes id 321 O Engine Oil Change Indicator System 323 Two Button EVIC If Equipped 324 Four Button EVIC If Equipped ll Uconnect amp SETTINGS Hard Keys eo 4 e na eae s SOEK EYS vies dept ees System 8 4 Settings Customer Programmable Features Uconnect E Uconnect amp 200 AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND SiriusXM RADIO ey pe bbs al os Gee eas O Operating Instructions
474. transmission into the PARK posi tion When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE R This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL N Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 435 WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE D This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transm
475. trol TCS Hill Start Assist HSA Brake Lock Differential BLD and Electronic Stability Control ESC These systems work together to enhance both E STARTING AND OPERATING 447 Anti Lock Brake System ABS The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically prevents wheel lock reduces stop distance and enhances vehicle control during stop When the vehicle is driven over 6 mph 10 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 6 mph 10 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e The clicking sound of solenoid valves Brake pedal pulsations Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS 448 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss WARNING WARNING Continued e The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the
476. ts to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not ee STARTING AND OPERATING 503 exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rea
477. tween the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period Performance is maximized under Low To Medium Blower Setting Low To Medium Vehicle Speed Low Road Noise Smooth Road Surface Fully Closed Windows Dry Weather Condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect amp Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred You can say O letter O for 0 zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported In a convertible vehicle system
478. u and use the TUNE SCROLL knob to highlight select Bass Mid Range Treble Balance or Fade Once the desired selection is highlighted press the ENTER BROWSE button to select the item and use the TUNE SCROLL knob to adjust the setting Press the ENTER BROWSE button and BASS will dis play Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the bass tones 368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Press the ENTER BROWSE button a second time and MID RANGE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the mid range tones Press the ENTER BROWSE button a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to de crease the treble tones Press the ENTER BROWSE button a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL con trol knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the sound level from the Left or Right side speakers Press the ENTER BROWSE button a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the BACK button to exit Bass Mid Range Treble Balance or Fade MENU Button Pressing the MENU button allows you to scroll between the setting sub menus Once the desired sub menu set ting is highlighted press the TUNE SCROLL knob to select the settin
479. uetooth Streaming BT mode say may say the following commands Bluetooth Streaming In this mode you may say the following commands e Track to change the track e Next Track to play the next track m Previous Track to play the previous track e Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track List to list an Artist Playlist Album Track etc Memo Mode e Main Menu to switch to the main menu USB Mode To switch to USB mode say USB In this mode you may say the following commands To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the following commands New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the Voice Command e Previous Track to play the previous track EVR button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of the following commands e Next Track to play the next track e Play to play an Artist Name Playlist Name Album Name Track Name etc Save to save the memo 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Continue to continue recording Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the Voice Com mand amp vRbutton to stop playing memos You pro ceed by saying one of the following commands Delete to delete the recording Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next
480. uggage load capacity calculated in step 4 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle The follow ing table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and num ber and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 892 kg 468 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Occupant 1 200 Ibs Weight Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ibs 865 Ibs 195 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 469 WARNING Safety WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended loa
481. uidance your voice Prompt is command repeated Player Home screen will be shown on the touch screen 0475016869 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 NOTE 3 Navigation commands only work if equipped with 1 Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles Navigation 2 You can replace Player with Radio Navigation ge pee Non Commands are shown in bold Phone Climate More or Settings grey 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Voice Command Navigation Universal Commands These commands can be spoken on any screen when not on a phone call after pushing the Uconnect voice command button e VR on the steering wheel Navigation Where Am I x A promp De System Guided Map screen Bam Wi The System will player asking if Psd System Guided Dialog for will be te choose an alternate you want to ee Dialog to enter finding displayed route that does not cancel the route Prompt is an address restaurants that are near to your current location displayed include the next turn repeated urrent Navigation Route will not be canceled Current Navigation Route will be canceled 0475016867 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 NOTE SEATS 1 You can also say Find City Find Favorite Find Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
482. uipped The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components Receiver Module Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low The audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for the first condition that it detects In addition the EVIC will display a Inflate Tire to XX message for a minimum of five seconds and a graphic of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing or displayed in a different color The recommended cold placard pressure inflation value is the pressure value displayed in the Inflate Tire to XX message displayed in the EVIC Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all tires th
483. unds distorted turn the device s volume down and radio volume up Operation Instructions Universal Serial Bus USB The USB audio input allows the user to plug in a flash drive and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the PLAYER button will change the mode to USB when an iPod or external USB drive is connected Pressing the ENTER BROWSE button while in USB mode will bring up a list of available categories within the USB The categories will consist of Playlists Artist Album Genre Audiobooks Podcasts and all Songs Browsing through the categories will function the same as iPod browse USB will not have folder browsing ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377 If the USB connected does not have any audio files and the user selects USB as the device to play audio the screen will display No audio files found This messaged is to be displayed for all devices that do not have audio files when connected and selected Security If this radio is installed in a vehicle that does not have a matching Vehicle Identification Number VIN an Secu rity code will need to be entered by the dealer CD PLAYER IF EQUIPPED The single disc CD player is located in the center console NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position before the CD player will operate The CD Player is part of the radio for the Uconnect 200 CD Play
484. urability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle 494 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non Flex Fuel FFV vehicles are compatible with gaso line containing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms Operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on Poor engine performance Poor cold start and cold driveability Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the fo
485. urn In Cluster soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Clock After pressing the Clock soft key the following settings will be available e Sync with GPS Time If Equipped When in this display you may automatically have the radio set the time To change the Sync with GPS Time setting touch the Sync with GPS Time soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting indicating that the setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss e Set Time Hours When in this display you may adjust the hours The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the hours up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen Hon e Set Time Minutes When in this display you may adjust the minutes The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the minutes up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen Hon e Time Format When in this display you may select the time format display setting Touch the Time Format
486. use block cover for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read dat
487. ute the Uconnect Phone e Press the Sve button Following the beep say Mute To un mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the Sve button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the EVR button and say Transfer Call ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between your mobile phone and the Uconnect amp Phone System follow the instructions de scribed in your mobile phone User s Manual List Paired Mobile Phone Names e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To Select or Delete a paired phone being announced press the Sve but
488. utlets Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets e Mix Mode We Air comes from the floor defrost and side window gt demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions e Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging When the defrost mode is selected the blower level may increase 398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss 13 SYNC Press the Sync soft key to toggle the Sync feature On Off The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature Climate Control Functions A C Air Conditioning The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When the air conditioning system is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin For improved fuel economy press the A C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings NOTE If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increase blower speed e
489. utomatic dimming mirror turns on and off by manually pressing the button at the base of the mirror 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse 030436523 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Outside Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage The hinge has three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Outsid
490. v 10 1305 D Hold P to reset A b did 1 Speedometer Digital or Analog km h or mph 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 2 Main Screen The inner ring of the display will illuminate in grey under normal conditions yellow for non critical warnings red for critical warnings and white for on demand information 3 Selectable Information Compass Temp Range to Empty Trip A Trip B Average MPG 4 Menu Titles Odometer 5 Menu Set Selectable Icons 6 Shift Lever Status PRNDL 7 Reconfigurable Telltales 9 Sub menu Current Position Whenever there are sub menus available the position within the sub menus is shown here Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Messages e Front Seatbelts Unbuckled e Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled e Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled Service Airbag System Traction Control Off Washer Fluid Low e Oil Pressure Low e Oil Change Due e Fuel Low Service Antilock Brake System Service Electronic Throttle Control E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335 e Service Power Steering e Lights On e Cruise Off e Right Turn Signal Light Out Cruise Ready Left Turn Signal Light Out e e Cruise Set To XXX MPH Turn Signal On Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire s Inflate Tire to e Vehicle Not In Park XX e Key In Ignition e Service Tire Pressure System Key In Ignition Lights On e Parking Brake Engaged Bra
491. vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others e The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip ment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capa bility Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer Continued Anti Lock Brake Warning Light es The Anti Lock Brake Warning Light moni tors the ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
492. ving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven 055007576 Performance tires tires with a speed rating of V or higher and summer tires typically have a reduced tread life Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main tenance schedule is highly recommended 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 479 WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart ex ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more inform
493. w instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owners Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 NOTE If other phones are present during the pairing process make sure they are switched to off or the bluetooth is disabled before proceeding The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions e Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Device Pairing When prompted after the beep say Pair a Device and follow the audible prompts For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked Should paired device be set as Favorite If yes this phone will become the highest priority You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one mobile phone can be in use connected to your Uconnect System The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which mobile phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at
494. way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone you will have the option of Answer Ignore or Transfer The cursor will begin on Answer Rotating the scroll knob will move between the options pressing Enter will select the cur rent item After accepting the call the options on the screen will be End Transfer Hold and Mute The top line will display the contact if the contact is not in the phonebook or the phonebook has not been downloaded es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 the phone number will be displayed on the screen Press the w button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the w button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ign
495. will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 3 Turn Signal Indicators CAUTION The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temp
496. written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshoot ing and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and mainte nance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips es F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 627 Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition t
497. y until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Rain Sensing Auto Wipers When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection touch the Rain Sensing soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Lights After pressing the Lights soft key the following settings will be available e Interior Ambient Lights When this feature is selected it allows the adjustment of the brightness of the interior ambient lighting To change the Interior Ambient Lights setting touch the or soft key to select your desired Interior Ambient Light level Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Interior Accent Lighting When this feature is selected the interior accent lighting surrounding the instrument panel will illuminate To make your selection touch the Interior Accent Lighting soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357 e Headlight Illumination On Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90
498. y taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper Ensure the ParkSense system is OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc are placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close 268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message to be displayed in WARDING the EVIC e Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense Always check carefully CAUTION behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death close proximity e The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to
499. y Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F50 7 5 Pneumatic Lumbar F91 7 5 Front Fog Lamps Amp Support Amp Left Brown Brown F51 7 5 Cd Hands Free F92 75 High Beams Shut Amp Module Amp ters Brown Bluetooth Radio Brown Display F93 15 Amp Right Headlamp F53 7 5 Driver Window Blue Amp Switch Power Mir En Ws VEHICLE STORAGE F89 5 Amp Trunk Lamp If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 Tan days you may want to take steps to preserve your F90 7 5 Front Fog Lamps battery Amp Right e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery Brown 602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again NOTE When the vehicle has not been started or driven for at least 35 days an Extended Park Start Procedure is required to start the vehicle Refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Bulbs Bulb Number W5W W5W Dome Lamp Overhead Console Lamp Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number Low Beam High Beam HIR2 Bi Halogen Headlamp Low Beam
500. y In Ignition Left Turn Signal Out Right Turn Signal Out Turn Signal On Lights On Low Beam Headlight Out High Beam Headlight Out License Plate Light Out Backup Light Out Brake Light Out Parking Light Out Service Air Bag System Service Air Bag Warning Light Washer Fluid Low Parking Brake Engaged Brake Fluid Low Service Electronic Braking System Engine Temperature Hot Battery Voltage Low Oil Pressure Low Fuel Low Service Antilock Brake System Service Electronic Throttle Control Transmission Too Hot Service Power Steering es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 e Oil Temperature Hot Cruise Set To XXX km h Check Fuel Cap e Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled Oil Change Due e Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled e Service Tire Pressure System e Front Seatbelts Unbuckled e Inflate Tire to XX Door Open Coolant Low Doors Open e Rain Sensor Fail Trunk Open Traction Control Off Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low e e Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset Engine Warming Wait To Start Too Cold Plug In Heater Cruise Off e e Remote Start Active Key To Run e e Remote Start Aborted Door Open e e Cruise Ready Cruise Set To XXX MPH Remote Start Aborted Hood Open e e Remote Start Aborted Time Expired 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e Remote Start Aborted Too Cold e Remote Start Active Push Start Button EVIC Main Menu To step to each main menu feature press and rel
501. y result dam age to the clutch system Shifting into lower gear and releasing the clutch may result in engine damage When descending a hill be very careful to down shift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine which can cause engine damage and or clutch damage even if the clutch pedal is pressed If transfer case is in low range the vehicle speeds to cause engine and clutch damage are significantly lower slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 415 CAUTION Continued Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds e Failure to follow the maximum recommended CAUTION downshifting speeds may cause the engine damage and or damage the clutch even if the clutch pedal Failure to follow the maximum recommended down is pressed shifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal and or damage the clutch disc even if the clutch depressed could result in clutch damage pedal is pressed Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH KM H Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to2 2to1 Maximum 80 129 70 113 50 81 30 48 15 24 Speed 416 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED CAUTION If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift at too high of a vehicle speed these conditions may cause the engine to overs
502. y the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale
503. zard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion On the highways slow down Incity traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat 520 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Ss e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum WARNING heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a You or others can be badly burned by hot engine supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If from the engine cooling system you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with SEES ARU TRE FOIS OIM mal Gi E toU fM the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops Proper lug nut

2014 Dodge Dart Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents